Cadillac 2005 XLR Specifications

2005 Cadillac XLR Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-2
Safety Belts
.............................................. 1-5
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-19
Airbag System
......................................... 1-36
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-48
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-2
Doors and Locks
....................................... 2-9
Windows ................................................. 2-16
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-19
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-21
Mirrors .................................................... 2-34
OnStar® System
...................................... 2-36
HomeLink® Transmitter
............................. 2-38
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-42
Retractable Hardtop .................................. 2-45
Vehicle Personalization
............................. 2-54
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-40
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators
........ 3-46
Driver Information Center (DIC)
.................. 3-61
Trip Computer
......................................... 3-77
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-78
M
Navigation System .......................................... 4-1
Overview
.................................................. 4-2
Features and Controls
................................ 4-4
Navigation Audio System ........................... 4-45
Voice Recognition ......................................4-69
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 5-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
..... 5-2
Towing
................................................... 5-35
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 6-1
Service ..................................................... 6-3
Fuel ......................................................... 6-5
Checking Things Under the Hood
............... 6-10
Rear Axle
............................................... 6-41
Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 6-42
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 6-44
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 6-45
Tires
...................................................... 6-46
Appearance Care
..................................... 6-70
Vehicle Identification
................................. 6-79
Electrical System ...................................... 6-80
Capacities and Specifications
..................... 6-85
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 7-1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 7-2
Customer Assistance and Information .............. 8-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 8-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 8-11
Index .................................................................1
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, CADILLAC,
the CADILLAC Crest & Wreath, and the name XLR
are registered trademarks of General Motors
Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time to the product without notice. For vehicles
first sold in Canada, substitute the name “General
Motors of Canada Limited” for Cadillac Motor Car
Division whenever it appears in this manual.
Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there if it is
needed while you are on the road. If the vehicle is
sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 05XLR A First Edition
ii
How to Use This Manual
Many people read the owner manual from beginning to
end when they first receive their new vehicle. If this
is done, it can help you learn about the features
and controls for the vehicle. Pictures and words work
together in the owner manual to explain things.
Index
A good place to quickly locate information about the
vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is an
alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the
page number where it can be found.
©
2004 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book. We
use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about things
that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not,
you or others could be hurt.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Do Not,”
“Do Not do this” or “Do Not
let this happen.”
iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. But
the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in
different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the following
topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
Features and Controls in Section 2
Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
Climate Controls in Section 3
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3
Audio System(s) in Section 3
Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
v
✍ NOTES
vi
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ......................................................1-2
Power Seats ..................................................1-2
Power Lumbar ...............................................1-2
Heated and Cooled Seats ................................1-3
Power Reclining Seatback ...............................1-4
Safety Belts .....................................................1-5
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone .................1-5
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ........1-9
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-10
Driver Position ..............................................1-10
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-17
Passenger Position .......................................1-18
Safety Belt Pretensioners ...............................1-18
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-18
Child Restraints .............................................1-19
Older Children ..............................................1-19
Infants and Young Children ............................1-21
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-24
Top Strap ....................................................1-27
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) ...........................1-28
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System .........................................1-30
Securing a Child Restraint in the Passenger
Seat Position ............................................1-32
Airbag System ...............................................1-36
Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-38
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-41
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-42
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-42
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....1-43
Airbag Off Switch ..........................................1-44
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-47
Restraint System Check ..................................1-48
Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................1-48
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash ...................................................1-48
1-1
Front Seats
• Slide the control forward or rearward to move the
Power Seats
• Press the vertical control rearward to recline the
entire seat forward or rearward.
seatback. Press the vertical control forward to
raise the seatback. See Power Reclining Seatback
on page 1-4.
Power Lumbar
The driver’s and
passenger’s seatback
lumbar support switches
are located on the
outboard sides of
the seats.
The power seat controls are located on the outboard
sides of both the driver’s and the passenger’s seats.
• Move the front of the horizontal control up or
down to adjust the front portion of the cushion.
• Move the rear of the horizontal control up or down
to adjust the rear portion of the cushion.
1-2
Use the power seat controls first to get the proper
position, then continue with the lumbar adjustment.
Use the top lumbar switch to adjust support to the
middle seatback and the bottom lumbar switch to adjust
support to the lower seatback. Press the front of the
switch to increase support and the rear of the switch to
decrease support.
Keep in mind that as your seating position changes, as
it may during long trips, so should the position of
your lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.
Heated and Cooled Seats
The buttons for the heated and cooled seats are located
on the climate controls.
( (Heated/Cooled Seat):
Press this button to turn the
feature on. The button on the left controls the driver’s
seat and the button on the right controls the passenger’s
seat. Each press of the button will take you to a
different setting. The settings available in order are
HI HEAT, LO HEAT, OFF, HI COOL, LO COOL
and OFF. You will be able to feel the temperature
change in a few minutes.
The feature will automatically shut off when the vehicle
is turned off.
1-3
Power Reclining Seatback
The vertical power seat control described earlier allows
the seatback to recline. See Power Seats on page 1-2
for more information.
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts can not do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can not do its job. In a
crash, you could go into it, receiving neck or
other injuries.
The lap belt can not do its job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
1-4
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she can not
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passenger’s belt is
fastened properly too.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up. See
Safety Belt Reminder
Light on page 3-48.
In most states and all Canadian provinces, the law says
to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
1-5
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a
crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter...a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat
on wheels.
1-6
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
doesn’t stop.
1-7
The person keeps going until stopped by something. In
a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-8
or the instrument panel...
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance
of being conscious during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.
A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of them. Every airbag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has
airbags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
1-9
Q: If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an
accident — even one that isn’t your fault — you
and your passenger can be hurt. Being a good
driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-19
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-21. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you will want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.
Safety belts are for everyone.
Driver Position
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wear
it properly.
1. Close the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index.
1-10
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-18.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,
it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and
start again.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
1-11
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would
be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-12
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-13
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-14
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-15
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-16
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
1-17
Passenger Position
Safety Belt Extender
To learn how to wear the passenger’s safety belt
properly, see Driver Position on page 1-10.
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners. They are on
the buckle end of the safety belts for the driver and
right front passenger. They help the safety belts reduce
a person’s forward movement in a moderate to
severe frontal and near frontal crash.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-48.
1-18
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer will
order you an extender. It is free. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and
use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has
been designed for adults. Never use it for securing
child seats. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety
belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet
that comes with the extender.
Child Restraints
Older Children
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt
should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt
should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or even
fatal internal injuries in a crash.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-19
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A: Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but
be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s
shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper
body would have the restraint that belts provide.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can not properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
1-20
Infants and Young Children
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
The lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug
on the hips, just touching the child’s thighs. This
applies belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.
1-21
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
{CAUTION:
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not
weigh much — until a crash. During a crash a
baby will become so heavy it is not possible to
hold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’s
arms. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
1-22
restraints?
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take into
consideration not only the child’s weight, height and
age but also whether or not the restraint will be
compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
{CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This is
necessary because a newborn infant’s neck is
weak and its head weighs so much compared
with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing seat settles into the restraint, so the
crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants always should be secured in
appropriate infant restraints.
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
1-23
Child Restraint Systems
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
1-24
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of the infant. The
harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,
acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some
booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and some
high-back booster seats have a five-point harness. A
booster seat can also help a child to see out the window.
1-25
Q: How do child restraints work?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have used
the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help
reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to be
secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt
system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
One system, the three-point harness, has straps that
come down over each of the infant’s shoulders and
buckle together at the crotch. The five-point harness
system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps and a
crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip
straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that
are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the
child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.
1-26
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it
will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in
your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured
within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal
injury. When securing an add-on child restraint, refer
to the instructions that come with the restraint which may
be on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and
to this manual. The child restraint instructions are
important, so if they are not available, obtain a
replacement copy from the manufacturer.
The child restraint must be secured properly in the
passenger seat. If you want to secure a rear-facing child
restraint in the passenger’s seat, turn off the passenger’s
airbags. See Airbag Off Switch on page 1-44 and
Securing a Child Restraint in the Passenger Seat
Position on page 1-32 for more on this, including
important safety information.
Top Strap
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the passenger’s
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating airbag. Be sure to turn off the
airbag before using a rear-facing child restraint
in the passenger seat position.
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether,”
which can help hold the child restraint during a
crash. For it to work, a top strap must be properly
anchored to the vehicle. Some child restraints with a top
strap are designed to be used whether or not the top
strap is anchored. Others require that the top strap
be anchored. Also, a national or local law may require
that the top strap be anchored.
If your child restraint top strap must be anchored, then
do not use the restraint in this vehicle, because in
it, a top strap cannot be properly anchored.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
1-27
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers
for Children (LATCH System)
Your vehicle has lower anchors at the passenger
position that can be used to install a child seat.
A label on the seatback
shows where each lower
anchor is.
You can use these lower anchors to install the child
seat instead of using the vehicle’s safety belts if the child
seat has the necessary attachments.
However, your vehicle does not have a third anchor,
called a top strap, or tether, anchor. If the instructions
that come with the child seat say that it must be secured
at all three anchors, do not use that child seat in this
vehicle. See Top Strap on page 1-27.
1-28
A. Lower Anchorage
B. Lower Anchorage
C. Top Tether
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to its anchorage points, the restraint will not
be able to protect the child correctly. In a
crash, the child could be seriously injured or
killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type child
restraint is properly installed using the
anchorage points, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
A. Lower Anchorage
B. Lower Anchorage
1-29
Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System
Your vehicle has passenger airbags. There is an airbag
off switch in the glove box you can use to turn off the
passenger’s airbags. See Airbag Off Switch on page 1-44
for more on this, including important safety information.
Your vehicle will either have the Canadian switch
design (A) or the United States switch design (B).
Unless the passenger’s airbags have been turned off,
never put a rear-facing child restraint in this vehicle.
Here is why:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the passenger’s
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in this vehicle unless the
passenger’s airbag has been turned off.
Even though the airbag off switch is designed
to turn off the passenger’s airbags under
certain conditions, no system is fail-safe, and
no one can guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual circumstance,
even though it is turned off.
CAUTION:
A. Canadian Switch
B. United States Switch
1-30
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
We, therefore, recommend that rear-facing
child restraints be transported in vehicles with
a rear seat that will accommodate a rear-facing
child restraint, whenever possible.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the passenger seat, always move
the passenger seat as far back as it will go.
(Continued)
If this ever happens, do not let anyone whom
the national government has identified as a
member of a passenger airbag risk group sit in
the passenger’s position (for example, do not
secure a rear-facing child restraint in your
vehicle) until you have your vehicle serviced.
See Airbag Off Switch on page 1-44.
1. Find the anchors in the passenger seat. See Lower
Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 1-28.
{CAUTION:
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on
when you have turned off the airbags, it means
that something may be wrong with the airbag
system. The passenger’s airbags could inflate
even though the switch is off.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
3. Attach the anchor points on the child restraint to the
anchors in the vehicle. The child restraint instructions
will show you how. See Top Strap on page 1-27 if
your child restraint has one.
4. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, disconnect the anchor
points.
1-31
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Passenger Seat Position
Your vehicle has passenger airbags. There is an airbag
off switch in the glove box you can use to turn off the
passenger’s airbags. See Airbag Off Switch on page 1-44
for more on this, including important safety information.
Your vehicle will either have the Canadian switch design
(A) or the United States switch design (B).
A. Canadian Switch
B. United States Switch
1-32
Unless the passenger’s airbags have been turned off,
never put a rear-facing child restraint in this vehicle.
Here is why:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the passenger’s
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in this vehicle unless the
passenger’s airbag has been turned off.
Even though the airbag off switch is designed
to turn off the passenger’s airbags under
certain conditions, no system is fail-safe, and
no one can guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual circumstance,
even though it is turned off. We, therefore,
recommend that rear-facing child restraints be
transported in vehicles with a rear seat that
will accommodate a rear-facing child restraint,
whenever possible.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the passenger seat, always move
the passenger seat as far back as it will go.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on
when you have turned off the airbags, it means
that something may be wrong with the airbag
system. The passenger’s airbags could inflate
even though the switch is off. If this ever
happens, do not let anyone whom the national
government has identified as a member of a
passenger airbag risk group sit in the
passenger’s position (for example, do not
secure a rear-facing child restraint in your
vehicle) until you have your vehicle serviced.
See Airbag Off Switch on page 1-44.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-28.
There are no top strap anchors in this vehicle. Do not
secure a child seat in this vehicle if a national or
local law requires that the top strap be anchored, or if
the instructions that come with the restraint say that the
top strap must be anchored. See Top Strap on
page 1-27 if the child restraint has one.
If your child restraint does not have the latch system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Your vehicle has passenger’s airbags. If you need
to use a rear-facing child restraint in this seat, make
sure the airbags are turned off. See Airbag Off
Switch on page 1-44. If your child restraint is
forward-facing, always move the seat as far back
as it will go before securing it in this seat. See
Power Seats on page 1-2.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-33
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-34
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
If you were using a rear-facing child restraint, turn on
the passenger’s airbags when you remove the
rear-facing child restraint from the vehicle unless the
person who will be sitting there is a member of a
passenger airbag risk group. See Airbag Off Switch on
page 1-44.
{CAUTION:
6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into
the retractor while you push down on the child
restraint. You may find it helpful to use your knee to
push down on the child restraint as you tighten
the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
If the passenger’s airbags are turned off for a
person who is not in a risk group identified by
the national government, that person will not
have the extra protection of the airbags. In a
crash, the airbags would not be able to inflate
and help protect the person sitting there. Do
not turn off the passenger’s airbags unless the
person sitting there is in a risk group. See
Airbag Off Switch on page 1-44 for more on
this, including important safety information.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-35
Airbag System
CAUTION:
Your vehicle has four airbags — a frontal airbag for the
driver, another frontal airbag for the passenger, a
side impact airbag for the driver, and another side
impact airbag for the passenger.
Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating frontal airbag.
But these airbags must inflate very quickly to do their
job and comply with federal regulations.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Airbags are designed to work
with safety belts but do not replace them.
CAUTION:
1-36
(Continued)
(Continued)
Frontal airbags for the driver and passenger
are designed to deploy only in moderate to
severe frontal and near frontal crashes. They
are not designed to inflate in rollover, rear or
low-speed frontal crashes, or in many side
crashes. And, for some unrestrained
occupants, frontal airbags may provide less
protection in frontal crashes than more
forceful airbags have provided in the past.
The side impact airbags for the driver and
passenger are designed to inflate only in
moderate to severe crashes where something
hits the side of your vehicle. They are not
designed to inflate in frontal, in rollover or in
rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact airbags inflate
with great force, faster than the blink of an
eye. If you are too close to an inflating airbag,
as you would be if you were leaning forward, it
could seriously injure you. Safety belts help
keep you in position for airbag inflation before
and during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt, even with frontal airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while still
maintaining control of the vehicle. Front
occupants should not lean on or sleep against
the door.
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults, but
not for young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
see Older Children on page 1-19 or Infants and
Young Children on page 1-21.
1-37
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows the airbag symbol.
Where Are the Airbags?
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-49
for more information.
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
1-38
The passenger’s frontal airbag is in the instrument panel
on the passenger’s side.
The driver’s side impact airbag is in the side of the
driver’s seatback closest to the door.
1-39
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or
it might force the object into that person
causing severe injury or even death. The path
of an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do
not put anything between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put anything on
the steering wheel hub or on or near any other
airbag covering. Do not let seat covers block
the inflation path of a side impact airbag.
The passenger’s side impact airbag is in the side of the
passenger’s seatback closest to the door.
1-40
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or
near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate only
if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds take into account a
variety of desired deployment and non-deployment
events and are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbags will
or should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle is
traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, the direction
of the impact and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal airbags,
which adjust the restraint according to crash severity.
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic frontal sensors
which help the sensing system distinguish between a
moderate frontal impact and a more severe frontal
impact. For moderate frontal impacts, these airbags
inflate at a level less than full deployment. For more
severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs. If the front
of your vehicle goes straight into a wall that does not
move or deform, the threshold level for the reduced
deployment is about 12 to 16 mph (19 to 26 km/h), and
the threshold level for a full deployment is about 18 to
24 mph (29 to 38.5 km/h). (The threshold level can vary,
however, with specific vehicle design, so that it can be
somewhat above or below this range.)
Airbags may inflate at different crash speeds. For
example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbag
could inflate at a different crash speed than if
the object were moving.
• If the object deforms, the airbag could inflate at
a different crash speed than if the object does
not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole) the
airbag could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the
airbag could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
The frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)
are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts because inflation
would not likely help the occupants.
The side impact airbags are designed to inflate in
moderate to severe side crashes. A side impact airbag
will inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s
designed “threshold level.” The threshold level can vary
with specific vehicle design. Side impact airbags are
not designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,
rollovers or rear impacts, because inflation would not
likely help the occupant. A side impact airbag will
only deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
1-41
Vehicles with dual stage airbags are also equipped with
seat position sensors which enable the sensing
system to monitor the position of the driver’s and
passenger’s seats. The seat position sensor provides
information which is used to determine if the airbags
should deploy at a reduced level or at full deployment.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle
slows down in frontal and near-frontal impacts. For side
impact airbags, inflation is determined by the location
and severity of the impact.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. For both
frontal and side impact airbags, the sensing system
triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which inflates
the airbag. The inflator, the airbag and related hardware
are all part of the airbag modules inside the steering
wheel, the instrument panel, and the side of the front
seatbacks closest to the door.
1-42
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The airbag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. But the frontal
airbags would not help you in many types of collisions,
including rollovers, rear impacts, and many side impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward the
airbag. Side impact airbags would not help you in many
types of collisions, including frontal or near frontal
collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts, primarily because
an occupant’s motion is not toward those airbags.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more than
a supplement to safety belts, and then only in moderate
to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions for the driver’s
and passenger’s frontal airbags, and only in moderate to
severe side collisions for the driver’s and passenger’s
side impact airbag.
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
{CAUTION:
After the airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly that
some people may not even realize the airbag inflated.
Some components of the airbag module — the steering
wheel hub for the driver’s airbag, the instrument panel for
the passenger’s bag, the side of the seatback closest to
the door for the driver’s and passenger’s side impact
airbags — will be hot for a short time. The parts of the
bag that come into contact with you may be warm, but not
too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and dust
coming from the vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag
inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing or being
able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop people from
leaving the vehicle.
When an airbag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
to do so. If you have breathing problems but
can not get out of the vehicle after an airbag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag deployment, you
should seek medical attention.
1-43
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
passenger airbag.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
your airbag system. If you do not get them,
the airbag system will not be there to help protect
you in another crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly other parts. The
service manual for your vehicle covers the need to
replace other parts.
Airbag Off Switch
Your vehicle has a switch in the glove box that you can
use to turn off the passenger’s airbags. Your vehicle
will either have the Canadian switch design (A) or
the United States switch design (B).
• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information after
a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders on page 8-9.
• Let only qualified technicians work on your airbag
system. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer for service.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the passenger’s airbags, the bags may not
work properly. You may have to replace the airbag
module in the steering wheel or both the airbag
module and the instrument panel for the
passenger’s airbags. Do not open or break the
airbag coverings.
1-44
A. Canadian Switch
B. United States Switch
This switch should only be turned to the off position if
the person in the passenger’s position is a member of a
passenger risk group identified by the national
government as follows:
Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) must
ride in the front seat because:
• my vehicle has no rear seat;
• my vehicle has a rear seat too small to
accommodate a rear-facing infant seat; or
• the infant has a medical condition which, according
to the infant’s physician, makes it necessary for the
infant to ride in the front seat so that the driver
can constantly monitor the child’s condition.
Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must
ride in the front seat because:
• my vehicle has no rear seat;
• although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear
seat(s) whenever possible, children ages 1 to 12
sometimes must ride in the front because no space
is available in the rear seat(s) of my vehicle; or
• the child has a medical condition which, according
to the child’s physician, makes it necessary for the
child to ride in the front seat so that the driver
can constantly monitor the child’s condition.
Medical Condition. A passenger has a
medical condition which, according to his or
her physician:
• causes the passenger airbag to pose a special risk
for the passenger; and
• makes the potential harm from the passenger
airbag in a crash greater than the potential
harm from turning off the airbag and allowing the
passenger, even if belted, to hit the dashboard
or windshield in a crash.
{CAUTION:
If the passenger’s airbags are turned off for a
person who is not in a risk group identified by
the national government, that person will not
have the extra protection of the airbags. In a
crash, the airbags would not be able to inflate
and help protect the person sitting there. Do
not turn off the passenger’s airbags unless the
person sitting there is in a risk group.
1-45
United States
Canada
To turn off the passenger’s airbags, insert your vehicle
key into the switch, push in, and move the switch to
the off position.
The airbag off light on the center console will come on
to let you know that the passenger’s airbags are off.
The airbag off light will stay on to remind you that
the airbags are off. The passenger’s airbags will remain
off until you turn them back on again.
1-46
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around your vehicle. You do not want the system to
inflate while someone is working on your vehicle. Your
dealer and the service manual have information
about servicing your vehicle and the airbag system. To
purchase a service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 8-12.
United States
Canada
To turn the passenger’s airbags on, insert your vehicle
key into the switch, push in, and move the switch to
the on position.
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the vehicle is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
airbag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close to an
airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow wires,
wires wrapped with yellow tape or yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
1-47
Restraint System Check
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint systems
are working properly after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary replacements
made as soon as possible.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if
worn during a more severe crash, then you need
new parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
1-48
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system was not being used at the time of
the collision.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
After a crash you may need to replace the driver and
front passenger’s safety belt buckle assemblies, even if
the frontal airbags have not deployed. The driver
and front passenger’s safety belt buckle assemblies
contain the safety belt pretensioners. Have your safety
belt pretensioners checked if your vehicle has been
in a collision, or if your airbag readiness light stays on
after you start your vehicle or while you are driving.
See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-49.
If the frontal airbags inflate, you will also need to
replace the driver’s and passenger’s safety belt buckle
assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the new buckle
assembly will be there to help protect you in a collision.
1-49
✍ NOTES
1-50
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-2
Keyless Access System ...................................2-4
Keyless Access System Operation ....................2-5
Doors and Locks .............................................2-9
Door Locks ....................................................2-9
Power Door Locks ........................................2-11
Automatic Door Locks ...................................2-12
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock .............2-12
Lockout Protection ........................................2-12
Trunk ..........................................................2-13
Windows ........................................................2-16
Power Windows ............................................2-17
Sun Visors ...................................................2-18
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-19
Theft-Deterrent System ..................................2-19
Valet Lockout Switch .....................................2-21
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-21
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-21
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-22
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-22
Starting Your Engine .....................................2-23
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-24
Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-25
Parking Brake ..............................................2-28
Shifting Into Park (P) .....................................2-30
Shifting Out of Park (P) .................................2-31
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-32
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-32
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked .......2-33
Mirrors ...........................................................2-34
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar® ............................................2-34
Outside Power Heated Mirrors ........................2-34
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ..................2-35
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror .....................2-35
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-36
OnStar® System .............................................2-36
HomeLink® Transmitter ...................................2-38
Programming the HomeLink® Transmitter .........2-39
Storage Areas ................................................2-42
Glove Box ...................................................2-42
Cupholder(s) ................................................2-42
Center Console Storage Area .........................2-42
Map Pocket .................................................2-43
Floor Mats ...................................................2-43
Rear Storage Area ........................................2-44
Convenience Net ..........................................2-44
Retractable Hardtop ........................................2-45
Lowering the Retractable Hardtop ...................2-45
Raising the Retractable Hardtop ......................2-46
Vehicle Personalization ...................................2-54
Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel .......2-54
2-1
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children unattended in a vehicle is
dangerous, but it is even more dangerous if
the keyless access transmitter is also left in
the vehicle. A child or others could be badly
injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
If they started the engine and moved the shift
lever out of PARK (P), that would release the
parking brake.
Do not leave the keyless access transmitter in
a vehicle with children.
2-2
There is a key that works
the glove box and can
open the trunk if vehicle
power is lost. See Trunk
on page 2-13 for more
information.
Your vehicle has a keyless access system with
pushbutton start. See Ignition Positions on page 2-22
for information on starting the vehicle.
Notice: Your vehicle has a number of features that
can help prevent theft. You can have a lot of
trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lose
your transmitters and/or key. You may even have to
damage your vehicle to get in. So be sure you
have a spare transmitter and/or key.
In an emergency, contact Cadillac Roadside Assistance.
See Roadside Service on page 8-6.
This key can also be used to turn on/off the passenger’s
airbags. See Airbag Off Switch on page 1-44.
If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar® system,
OnStar® may be able to send a command to unlock your
vehicle if needed. If the vehicle battery is dead, OnStar®
will be unable to unlock the vehicle. See OnStar® System
on page 2-36 for more information.
2-3
Keyless Access System
Your vehicle has a Keyless Access System that
operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with
Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-4
If you ever notice a decrease in the remote keyless
entry transmitter range, try doing one of the following:
• Check the distance. You may be too far from
your vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
Keyless Access System Operation on page 2-5.
• Check to make sure that an electronic device such
as a cellular phone or lap top computer is not
causing interference.
• If you’re still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
Keyless Access System Operation
Q (Lock):
Your vehicle has a Keyless Access System that allows
you to lock and unlock your doors, unlock your trunk lid
and disarm or arm your theft-deterrent system. The range
distance is as much as 100 feet (30 m) away.
K (Unlock):
Your vehicle comes
with two transmitters,
and up to four can
be matched to your
vehicle. See “Matching
Transmitter(s) to
Your Vehicle” later in
this section.
Press this button to lock the doors.
The indicator light on the door will flash once. If this
button is pressed twice, the doors will lock, the light will
flash once and the horn will sound once.
Press this button once to unlock the
driver’s door. The indicator light on the door will flash
twice. Press the button twice within 10 seconds to
unlock both doors. If it is dark enough outside, your
interior lamps will come on.
Your memory settings may also be recalled when
you press the unlock button on the keyless access
transmitter. See Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering
Wheel on page 2-54 for more information.
G (Trunk):
Press this button to open the trunk
while the engine is turned off or the shift lever is
in PARK (P).
2-5
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle
5. Turn the key five times within five seconds.
Each keyless access transmitter is coded to prevent
another transmitter from working with your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be
purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any
remaining transmitters with you when you go to your
dealer. Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter,
the lost transmitter will not work with your vehicle.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of four transmitters
matched to it.
6. The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display
READY FOR FOB #X. X can be 2, 3 or 4.
To match a new transmitter to your vehicle when you
have a recognized transmitter, do the following:
1. The vehicle must be off.
2. Have the recognized and new, unrecognized
transmitters on your person.
3. Go to the rear of the vehicle and insert the vehicle
key into the key cylinder located on the lower rear
fascia on the driver’s side of the vehicle. See Trunk
on page 2-13 for more information on the key
cylinder.
4. Open the trunk.
2-6
7. Place the new, unrecognized transmitter in the
glove box transmitter pocket with the buttons
facing to the right.
8. Once the transmitter is programmed, a beep will
sound. The DIC will display READY FOR #X,
where X can be 3 or 4, or MAX # FOBS LEARNED.
9. Press the ACC button.
The Canadian immobilizer standard requires Canadian
owners to see their GM dealer for matching new
transmitters when a recognized transmitter is not
available. United States owners are permitted to match
a new transmitter to their vehicle when a recognized
transmitter is not available. The procedure will require
three ten minute cycles to complete the matching
process. Do the following:
1. The vehicle must be off.
2. Place the new, unrecognized transmitter in the
glove box transmitter pocket with the buttons
facing to the right.
3. Go to the rear of the vehicle and insert the vehicle
key into the key cylinder located on the lower rear
fascia on the driver’s side of the vehicle. See Trunk
on page 2-13 for more information on the key
cylinder.
4. Open the trunk.
5. Turn the key five times within five seconds.
6. The DIC message will display OFF-ACC TO
LEARN.
7. Press the ACC button.
13. Press the ACC button.
14. The DIC will read WAIT 10 MINUTES and will
count down to zero, one minute at a time.
15. A beep will sound and the DIC will read READY
FOR FOB #1. At this time, all previously known
transmitters have been erased.
16. Once the transmitter is recognized and
programmed, a beep will sound and the DIC will
display READY FOR FOB #2.
10. Press the ACC button.
If you have additional transmitters to program, take
transmitter 1 out of the transmitter pocket and place
transmitter 2 in the pocket. This can be done repeatedly
until up to four transmitters have been programmed.
The DIC will then display MAX # FOBS LEARNED and
will exit the programming mode.
11. The DIC will read WAIT 10 MINUTES and will
count down to zero, one minute at a time.
When you are done programming transmitters, press
the ACC button.
8. The DIC will read WAIT 10 MINUTES and will
count down to zero, one minute at a time.
9. The DIC will display OFF-ACC TO LEARN again.
12. The DIC will display OFF-ACC TO LEARN again.
2-7
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your keyless access
transmitter should last about three years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter will not
work at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it is probably time to change the battery.
A weak battery may also cause the DIC to display
NO FOBS DETECTED when you try to start the vehicle.
If this happens, place the transmitter in the glove box
transmitter pocket with the buttons facing to the right.
Then, with the vehicle in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N),
press the brake pedal and the START button. Although
this will start the vehicle, it is recommended that you
replace the transmitter battery as soon as possible.
The DIC may display FOB BATTERY LOW.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
1. Insert a coin or similar object into the slot on the
back of the transmitter and gently pry apart the
front and back.
2. Gently pull the battery out of the transmitter.
3. Put the new battery in the transmitter, positive (+)
side up. Use a battery, type CR2032, or equivalent.
4. Reassemble the transmitter. Make sure to put
it together so water will not get in.
5. Test the transmitter.
2-8
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked it
will not open. You increase the chance of
being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash
if the doors are not locked. So, wear safety
belts properly and lock the doors
whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
To lock or unlock your vehicle from the outside, use the
keyless access transmitter and press the appropriate
lock or unlock button. You may also unlock and open the
door passively when you squeeze the door handle
sensor, as long as you have your transmitter with you.
Passive entry occurs when the door handle sensor
is pressed and the vehicle recognizes your keyless
access transmitter. When the passenger door is opened
first, the driver’s door will also become unlocked.
From the inside, use the power door lock buttons
located at the top of the door panel near the window.
See “Power Door Locks” following for more information.
2-9
To open a door from the inside, press the button in front
of the door handle and push the door open.
If power to the vehicle or the keyless access transmitter
is lost, there are two ways to open the door.
2-10
If you are inside the vehicle, use the door release
handle located on the floor next to each seat. Pull the
handle up to unlock and unlatch the door.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock
switches are located on
the door panels near
the windows.
If you are outside the vehicle, there is a door release
tab in the trunk. The tab is located behind a panel on the
driver’s side of the trunk. Pull the handle to unlock
and unlatch the driver’s door. See Trunk on page 2-13
for information on opening the trunk during a loss
of power.
K (Unlock):
Press this portion of the button to unlock
the doors.
Q (Lock):
Press this portion of the button to lock
the doors.
There is an indicator light on the rear of the door near
the window.
2-11
When the lock portion of the button is pressed and the
door is closed, a beep will sound and the light will
come on for a few seconds, then turn off. If the button is
pressed and the door is open, a beep will sound and
the light will stay on continuously.
When the unlock portion of the button is pressed and
the door is closed, a beep will sound and the light
will flash twice. When the button is pressed and the door
is open, a beep will sound and the light will flash.
Automatic Door Locks
Your vehicle is programmed so that, when the doors are
closed, the ignition is on and the shift lever is moved
out of PARK (P), all the doors will lock.
If someone needs to get out while the vehicle is not in
PARK (P), have the person use the power door unlock
switch. When the door is closed again, the doors will lock
either when your foot is removed from the brake or the
vehicle speed becomes faster than 8 mph (13 km/h).
2-12
Programmable Automatic
Door Unlock
Your vehicle is programmed so that, when the shift
lever is moved into PARK (P), both door will unlock.
With the vehicle in PARK (P) and the engine running,
door unlocking can be programmed through prompts
displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC).
These prompts allow the driver to choose various unlock
settings. For programming information, see DIC
Vehicle Personalization on page 3-73.
Lockout Protection
Your vehicle can be programmed to sound the horn
three times and unlock the driver’s door when both
doors are closed and there is a keyless access
transmitter inside the vehicle. When the driver’s door
is opened, the key in reminder chime will sound
continuously. The vehicle will remain locked only when
at least one transmitter has been removed from the
vehicle and both doors are closed. See DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-73.
Trunk
Trunk Lock Release
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You cannot see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. If you must drive with the trunk lid
open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the trunk lid:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Climate Control
System in the Index.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
Moving parts of the powered trunk lid can be
dangerous. You or others could be injured.
Keep yourself and others away from the trunk
lid and its mechanism while it is closing.
The trunk lock release
button is located to the left
of the steering wheel on
the instrument panel.
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-32.
Press the button to open the trunk. To use this feature,
your vehicle must be in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
and the valet lockout switch must be off.
2-13
You can also press the button with the trunk symbol
on the keyless access transmitter to open the trunk.
To disable this feature, see “Valet Lockout Switch” under
Theft-Deterrent Systems on page 2-19.
To stop the trunk lid while it is closing, do one of the
following:
You may passively enter the trunk when you squeeze
the trunk release sensor located on the rear of the trunk
lid under the emblem, as long as you have your
transmitter with you. The vehicle must be in PARK (P)
and the valet lockout switch must be off. See Valet
Lockout Switch on page 2-21.
• Use the vehicle key on the rear fascia.
• Squeeze the trunk release sensor located on the
To close the trunk,
press the button on the
underside of the trunk lid.
• Press the trunk lock release button located on the
instrument panel.
rear of the trunk lid.
• Press the button with the trunk symbol on the
keyless access transmitter.
• Press the trunk close button on the underside of the
trunk lid.
To begin opening the trunk from the stopped position,
use any of the methods above, except pressing the trunk
close button.
To resume closing the power trunk lid, press the trunk
close button on the underside of the trunk lid.
2-14
If the vehicle has lost
battery power, you can
still open the trunk
using the key.
The key cylinder is located behind a cover on the
lower rear fascia on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
Use the key to pry open the door to access the
key cylinder.
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
Notice: Using the emergency trunk release handle
as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk may damage it. Use the
emergency trunk release handle only to help you
open the trunk lid.
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
handle located inside the trunk near the latch.
This handle will glow following exposure to light.
Pull the release handle and push up on the trunk lid
to release the latch from the inside.
2-15
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child,
a helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
2-16
Power Window Initialize
Power Windows
The power window
switches are located on
each door near the
armrest.
After a power reconnect such as battery replacement,
the express-up and index-up features will not function
until the system is initialized. Once power is restored,
do the following:
1. Close the door.
2. Raise the window by holding the up arrow on the
power window switch.
3. Hold the up arrow for three seconds after the
window is closed. Release the switch. Then hold
the up arrow again for three seconds.
The express-up system must be initialized to operate the
windows with the door open and the retractable hardtop.
Press the up or down arrows on the switches to raise or
lower the windows.
Express-Down Window
Your vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
that allows you to use the power windows once
the ignition has been turned off. For more information,
see Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-22.
This feature is on both power windows. Press the down
arrow on the switch to the second position to activate
the express-down feature. If you want to stop the
window as it is lowering, press the switch again.
Express-Up Window
This feature is on both power windows. Press the
up arrow on the switch to the second position to
activate the express-up feature. If you want to stop
the window as it is raising, press the switch again.
2-17
Anti-Pinch Feature
Express Window Override
If any object is in the path of the window when the
express-up is active, the window will stop at the
obstruction and auto-reverse to a preset factory position.
Weather conditions such as severe icing may also
cause the window to auto-reverse. The window
will return to normal operation once the obstruction or
condition is removed.
A condition may exist that causes auto-reversal of the
window due to weather or an obstruction. In an
emergency, the anti-pinch feature can be overridden in
a supervised mode. Hold the window switch all the
way down in the express position. The window will rise
for as long as the switch is held. Once the switch is
released, the express mode is re-activated.
{CAUTION:
If express override is activated, the window
will not reverse automatically. You or others
could be injured and the window could be
damaged. Before you use express override,
make sure that all people and obstructions are
clear of the window path.
In this mode, the window can still close on an object in
its path. Use care when using the override mode.
Window Indexing
This feature automatically lowers the window a small
amount when the door is opened. Then, when the door
is closed, the window will raise to its full up position.
Sun Visors
Swing down the visor to block out glare. It can also be
detached from the center mount and moved to the side.
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirrors
Swing the visor down and lift the cover. The lamp will
automatically come on when the cover is opened.
2-18
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Arming the System
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
Use one of the three following items listed here to arm
the system:
Theft-Deterrent System
Your vehicle is equipped with a theft-deterrent alarm
system.
With this system, the
security light will flash
when the door is open
and locked with the
power door lock switch.
If this light is on continuously while the engine is
running, your vehicle needs service.
• Press the lock button on the keyless access
transmitter.
• Open the door. Lock the door with the power door
lock switch. The security light should flash. Remove
the keyless access transmitter from the interior of the
vehicle and close the door. The security light will stop
flashing and stay on. After 30 seconds, the light
should turn off.
• The vehicle can be programmed to automatically
lock the doors and arm the system when you exit
the vehicle. See DIC Vehicle Personalization on
page 3-73.
Now, if a door or the trunk lid is opened without the
keyless access transmitter, the alarm will go off.
Your horn will sound for two minutes, then it will go off
to save battery power. And, your vehicle will not
start without a keyless transmitter present.
2-19
The theft-deterrent system will not arm if you lock the
driver’s door with the power door lock switch after
the doors are closed.
If your passenger stays in the vehicle when you leave
with the keyless access transmitter, have the passenger
lock the vehicle after the doors are closed. This way the
alarm will not arm, and your passenger will not set it off.
Testing the Alarm
Do the following to test the system:
1. Make sure the trunk lid is latched.
2. Lower the window on the driver’s door.
3. Manually arm the system.
4. Close the doors and wait 30 seconds.
5. Reach through the open window and manually pull
the release lever on the floor.
6. Turn off the alarm by pressing the unlock button on
the transmitter.
2-20
If the alarm is inoperative, check to see if the horn
works. If not, check the horn fuse. See Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 6-80. If the horn works, but the
alarm doesn’t go off, see your dealer.
Disarming the System
Always use your keyless access transmitter to unlock a
door either by pressing the unlock button on the
transmitter or by squeezing the door handle sensor
while you have the transmitter with you. Unlocking a
door any other way will set off the alarm. If your alarm
sounds, press the unlock button on the keyless
access transmitter to disarm it.
Valet Lockout Switch
The valet lockout switch
is located inside the
glove box.
Starting and Operating
Your Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less
for the first 500 miles (805 km).
• Do not drive at any one speed — fast or
slow — for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Do not make full-throttle starts.
Press the switch to ON to disable the use of the trunk
and convertible top. The trunk cannot be opened except
by using the key if the valet lockout is on.
Press the switch to OFF to enable the use of the trunk
and convertible top.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time your new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with
new linings can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake linings.
Locking the glove box with your key will also help to
secure your vehicle.
2-21
Ignition Positions
Your vehicle has an
electronic keyless ignition
with pushbutton start.
When the engine is off, press this button to place the
vehicle in accessory mode. ACCESSORY MODE
ON will display on the Driver Information Center (DIC).
This mode allows you to use things like the radio
and the windshield wipers while the engine is off.
Use ACC if you must have your vehicle in motion while
the engine is off, for example, if your vehicle is being
pushed or towed.
After being in ACC for about 20 minutes, the vehicle will
automatically enter RAP or OFF, depending on if the
doors are opened or closed.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
The following accessories on your vehicle may be used
for up to 10 minutes after the engine is turned off:
/ (START):
Press this button while your foot is on the
brake to start the engine. The keyless access transmitter
must be in the vehicle for the ignition to work.
9 ACC (OFF/ACCESSORY):
When the engine is on
or in accessory mode, press this button to turn the
engine off and place the vehicle in RAP. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-22 for more
information.
2-22
• Radio
• Power Windows
• Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Power to these accessories stops after 10 minutes or
if a door is opened. If you want power for another
10 minutes, close all the doors and press the ACC
button to place the vehicle in accessory mode. Press the
button again and the vehicle will return to RAP.
Starting Your Engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine will not start in any other position — that is
a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
The keyless access transmitter must be in the vehicle
for the ignition to work.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
1. With your foot on the brake pedal, press the
START button. When the engine begins cranking,
let go of the button. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm.
If the battery in the keyless access transmitter is
weak, the DIC will display FOB BATTERY LOW.
You can still drive the vehicle. See “Battery
Replacement” under Keyless Access System
Operation on page 2-5 for more information.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly.
Stopping Your Engine
Move the shift lever to PARK (P) and press the ACC
button. If the shifter is not in PARK (P), the vehicle will
go into accessory mode and the DIC will display
SHIFT TO PARK. Once the shifter is moved to
PARK (P), the vehicle will turn off.
If the keyless access transmitter is not detected while
going to off, the DIC will display NO FOB – OFF
OR RUN?.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-64
for more information.
2. If the engine does not start and no DIC message is
displayed, wait 15 seconds before trying again.
2-23
Engine Coolant Heater
Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine
coolant heater.
In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You will get easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a
minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant
heater is not required.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The electrical cord is located on the driver’s side
of the engine compartment, in front of the engine
coolant surge tank.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
2-24
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could
be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you will be parking
your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice
for that particular area.
Automatic Transmission Operation
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle will not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, always set your parking
brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P).
See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-30.
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels. It is
the best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle cannot move easily.
Be sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system.
You have to fully apply your regular brakes before you
can shift from PARK (P) when the vehicle is running.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way into
PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then move
the shift lever into the gear you wish. See Shifting Out of
Park (P) on page 2-31.
2-25
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transmission,
see If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on
page 5-29.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
2-26
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not running
at high speed when shifting your vehicle.
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is for
normal driving.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal
may damage the transmission. If you are stuck, do
not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the
brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
Maximum engine speed is limited to protect driveline
components from improper operation.
Driver Shift Control
The driver shift control feature gives you more manual
control over the operation of the transmission.
To use this feature,
move the shift lever
from the AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (D) position
to the left and into the
driver shift control gate.
The Head-Up Display (HUD) will display the change in
gear range, though the actual upshift or downshift
may be delayed until the engine speed is correct for the
requested gear range.
The currently selected gear will be remembered as
the selected gear range and will be displayed in
the HUD. See Head-Up Display (HUD) on page 3-34.
The gear range indicated in the HUD is only a requested
range of available gears. It does not indicate that the
vehicle will operate only in that specific gear. The actual
gear the vehicle will choose depends on a combination
of the driver-requested gear range, vehicle speed
and throttle position.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle at high rpms
without upshifting while using Driver Shift Control
(DSC), you could damage your vehicle. Always
upshift when necessary while using DSC.
A plus symbol will also appear on the shift console
above the AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) indicator and
minus symbol will appear below the indicator.
To request an upshift, briefly move the shift lever up
toward the plus symbol. To request a downshift, briefly
move the shift lever down toward the minus symbol.
If you do not upshift as the engine approaches the
redline engine rpm for the selected gear range,
an engine speed limiter will prevent over-revving by
limiting the engine rpm available.
Not all manual downshift requests will be accepted by
the transmission. To prevent over-revving the engine,
each gear range has a maximum vehicle speed
associated with it. Any downshift request above this
speed will be ignored by the transmission.
2-27
Some automatic downshifts may occur to maintain
minimum engine speed. This will only occur if you leave
the vehicle in too high of a gear range for the speed
the vehicle is traveling. For example, if you have been
driving in fifth gear range and come to a stop without
manually downshifting, fifth gear range will continue to
display in the HUD. The transmission will automatically
downshift to second gear. As you begin to drive
and accelerate, the transmission will automatically
upshift as quickly as possible to the selected fifth
gear range.
Parking Brake
The parking brake pedal is
located to the left of the
regular brake pedal,
near the driver’s door.
In higher gear ranges, an automatic downshift will
occur if you press the accelerator pedal to the floor.
This feature provides you with adequate acceleration
capabilities if you forget to downshift manually.
Automatic upshifts and downshifts will not display in
the HUD.
Driver shift control is available while the cruise control is
engaged. The shift behavior of the transmission will
react differently than when cruise control is not engaged.
This is not a malfunction and is necessary to allow
proper operation of the cruise control.
To return to fully automatic operation, move the shift
lever to the right and back into the AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (D).
2-28
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot and push the parking brake
pedal down with your left foot.
If the ignition is on, the parking brake indicator light
on the instrument panel cluster should come on.
If it does not, you need to have your vehicle serviced.
When you move out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and
the engine is running, the parking brake should
release. If the parking brake has not been fully released
and you try to drive off with the parking brake on, the
parking brake indicator light will come on and stay on.
If the parking brake does not fully release, you can
manually release the pedal. However, be sure to read
the following paragraphs:
{CAUTION:
Always shift to PARK (P) before pulling the
manual release lever. If your hand or arm is
in the way of the pedal you could be hurt.
The pedal springs back quickly. Keep your
hand and arm away when you use the manual
release lever.
Before releasing the manual parking brake, be sure to
put the vehicle in PARK (P) and turn the ignition off.
Reach under the driver’s side of the instrument panel
and pull down on the manual release lever, which
is located behind the parking brake pedal. Pull down on
the yellow tab as shown by the arrow in the illustration.
If the parking brake does not release, you should
have your vehicle towed to your dealer for service.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
2-29
Shifting Into Park (P)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pushing the
lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition off.
2-30
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
have moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold down
the regular brake pedal. See if you can move the
shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it
toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever was
not fully locked into PARK (P).
Torque Lock
Shifting Out of Park (P)
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and
then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into
PARK (P)” listed previously in this section.
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply your regular
brake before you can shift from PARK (P) when
the vehicle is running. See Automatic Transmission
Operation on page 2-25.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever – push the shift lever all the way into
PARK (P) and release the shift lever button as you
maintain brake application. Then press the shift lever
button and move the shift lever into the gear you wish.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still cannot
shift out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Press the ACC button twice to place the ignition in
accessory mode.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the engine and then shift to the drive gear
you want.
5. Have your vehicle inspected by your dealer as soon
as possible.
2-31
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot
see or smell. It can cause unconsciousness
and death.
{CAUTION:
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over
road debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other
things that can burn.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-32
Running Your Engine While You
Are Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if
you ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Engine Exhaust on page 2-32.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always set
your parking brake and move the shift lever
to PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-30.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See Winter Driving on page 5-25.
2-33
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar®
Outside Power Heated Mirrors
The controls for the
outside power mirrors are
located is on the driver’s
door armrest.
Your vehicle has an automatic dimming inside rearview
mirror. The mirror also contains OnStar® controls.
For more information about OnStar®, see OnStar®
System on page 2-36.
O (On/Off): This button, located on the lower left side
of the mirror, is for the automatic dimming functions.
Mirror Operation
The automatic dimming feature is active each time the
vehicle is started.
To turn the automatic dimming feature on or off, press
and release the on/off button. The indicator light will
illuminate when this feature is active.
Cleaning the Mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
2-34
Move the selector switch, located below the four-way
control pad, to the left or the right to choose the driver’s
side or passenger’s side mirror. Use the arrows
located on the four-way control pad to adjust the position
of the mirror. Adjust each outside mirror so that a little
of the vehicle and the area behind it can be seen
while sitting in a comfortable driving position. Keep the
selector switch in the center position when not
adjusting either outside mirror.
Both mirrors have a heated feature to rid them of snow,
ice, or condensation. They will heat when the rear
window defogger is turned on. See “Rear Window
Defogger” under Dual Climate Control System on
page 3-40. If the vehicle has the memory option, the
preferred mirror position can be stored. See Memory
Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 2-54.
Both mirrors can be manually folded inward by pulling
them toward the vehicle. This feature may be useful
when going through a car wash or a confined space.
Push the mirrors away from the vehicle, to the normal
position, before driving.
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror
The driver’s side mirror will adjust for the glare of
headlamps behind you. This feature is controlled by the
on and off settings on the inside automatic dimming
rearview mirror. See Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror with OnStar® on page 2-34.
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror
The passenger’s side mirror is also capable of
performing the curb view assist feature. This feature will
cause the mirror to tilt to a factory programmed
position when the vehicle is in REVERSE (R). This
feature may be useful in allowing you to view the curb
when you are parallel parking.
If further adjustment is needed after the mirror is tilted,
the mirror switch may be used. The mirror will then
return to this new position when the vehicle is shifted
into REVERSE (R).
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R) and
a five-second delay has occurred, the passenger’s side
mirror will return to its original position.
This feature can be enabled/disabled through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See “Park Assist” under
DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-73 for more
information.
2-35
Outside Convex Mirror
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from the
driver’s seat. It also makes things look farther away
than they really are.
2-36
OnStar® System
OnStar® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellite
technology, wireless communications, and call centers
to provide you with a wide range of safety, security,
information, and convenience services.
A complete OnStar® user’s guide and the terms and
conditions of the OnStar® Subscription Service
Agreement are included in the vehicle’s glove box
literature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com
or www.onstarcanada.com. Contact OnStar® at
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827), or press the
OnStar® button to speak to an OnStar® advisor
24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
Terms and conditions of the Subscription Service
Agreement can be found at www.onstar.com.
OnStar® Services
OnStar® Personal Calling
The following plan is included on new vehicles for
one year from the date of purchase. This OnStar®
subscription can be extended for time beyond the first
year to meet your needs. For more information,
press the OnStar® button to speak with an advisor.
As an OnStar® subscriber, the Personal Calling
capability is a hands-free wireless phone that is
integrated into the vehicle. Calls can be placed
nationwide using simple voice commands with no
additional contracts and no additional roaming charges.
To find out more about OnStar® Personal Calling,
refer to the OnStar® user’s guide in the vehicle’s glove
box, visit www.onstar.com or www.onstarcanada.com;
or speak with an OnStar® advisor by pressing the
OnStar® button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827).
Directions and Connections Plan
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Tracking
• AccidentAssist
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• Remote Diagnostics
• Online Concierge
• Driving Directions
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar® Personal Calling
that uses minutes to access up-to-date weather and
traffic reports for your area, news and sports updates,
stock quotes, entertainment, and more. You are
also able to listen and reply to e-mail through the
vehicle’s audio system. Customize your information
profile at www.myonstar.com. See the OnStar® user’s
guide for more information.
2-37
HomeLink® Transmitter
If your vehicle is equipped with the HomeLink®
Transmitter, it complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
If your vehicle has this feature, the control buttons are
located on the driver’s sun visor.
HomeLink®, a combined universal transmitter and
receiver, provides a way to replace up to three hand−held
transmitters used to activate devices such as gate
operators, garage door openers, entry door locks,
security systems and home lighting. Additional
Homelink® information can be found on the internet at
www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
2-38
Changes and modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
Programming the HomeLink®
Transmitter
Do not use the HomeLink® Transmitter with any garage
door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”
feature. This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982. If you have a newer
garage door opener with rolling codes, please be
sure to follow Steps 6 through 8 to complete the
programming of your HomeLink® Transmitter.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the HomeLink® Transmitter. Because of
the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you in programming the
transmitter.
Keep the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as
well as for future HomeLink® programming. It is also
recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,
the programmed HomeLink® buttons should be erased
for security purposes. Refer to “Erasing HomeLink®
Buttons” or, for assistance, contact HomeLink® on
the internet at: www.homelink.com or by calling
1-800-355-3515.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the
garage door or gate operator you are programming.
When programming a garage door, it is advised to
park outside of the garage.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio frequency.
Programming HomeLink®
Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while
programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to
program up to three channels:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons,
releasing only when the indicator light begins to
flash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down the
buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not
repeat this step to program a second and/or third
transmitter to the remaining two HomeLink® buttons.
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter about
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink®
buttons while keeping the indicator light in view.
2-39
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desired
button on HomeLink® and the hand-held transmitter
button. Do not release the buttons until Step 4
has been completed.
Some entry gates and garage door openers may
require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure
noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming” later in this section.
4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly after HomeLink® successfully receives the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter.
Release both buttons.
5. Press and hold the newly-trained HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and your device should activate when the
HomeLink® button is pressed and released.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
begin with Step 2 under “Programming HomeLink®.”
Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the
programmed channels.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds
and then turns to a constant light, continue with
Steps 6 through 8 following to complete the
programming of a rolling-code equipped device
(most commonly, a garage door opener).
2-40
6. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. This can usually be found
where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the
motor-head unit.
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. The name and color of the button may
vary by manufacturer.
You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.
8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold the
programmed HomeLink® button for two seconds,
then release. Repeat the press/hold/release
sequence a second time, and depending on the
brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling
code device), repeat this sequence a third time
to complete the programming.
HomeLink® should now activate your rolling-code
equipped device.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
begin with Step 2 of “Programming HomeLink®.”
You do not want to repeat Step 1, as this will erase all
previous programming.
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to “time out” or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.
Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured to
“time out” in the same manner.
Using HomeLink®
Press and hold the appropriate HomeLink® button for at
least half of a second. The indicator light will come
on while the signal is being transmitted.
Erasing HomeLink® Buttons
To erase programming from the three buttons do the
following:
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator by using the “Programming
HomeLink® ” procedures (regardless of where you live),
replace Step 3 under “Programming HomeLink® ” with
the following:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.
Do not hold the two outside buttons for longer
than 30 seconds.
Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button while
you press and release every two seconds (cycle)
your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal
has been successfully accepted by HomeLink®.
The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly. Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
HomeLink® ” to complete.
HomeLink® is now in the train (learning) mode and can
be programmed at any time beginning with Step 2
under “Programming HomeLink® ” shown earlier in
this section.
2. Release both buttons.
Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they can be
reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a Single
HomeLink® Button” following this section.
2-41
Reprogramming a Single
HomeLink® Button
Storage Areas
To program a device to HomeLink® using a HomeLink®
button previously trained, follow these steps:
Glove Box
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button.
Do not release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. While still holding the HomeLink®
button, proceed with Step 2 under “Programming
HomeLink® ” shown earlier in this section.
Resetting Defaults
To reset HomeLink® to default settings do the following:
1. Hold down the two outside buttons for about
20 seconds until the indicator light begins to flash.
2. Continue to hold both buttons until the HomeLink®
indicator light turns off.
3. Release both buttons.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink®
at 1-800-355-3515, or on the internet at
www.homelink.com.
2-42
To open the glove box, lift up on the lever. The glove
box has a light inside.
Cupholder(s)
The cupholders are located under a lid in the front
console to the right of the shift lever. Press the left side
of the lid and it will open automatically.
Center Console Storage Area
There is a center console storage area located between
the seats. To open this storage area, pull up the lid
on the front edge of the console and swing it rearward.
There is also an upright center console storage area
between the seatbacks. To open the storage area, press
and release the button near the top so it extends out.
Then, turn the button in either direction to unlatch the lid
and pull the console lid down. After you close the lid,
press the release button back in.
Map Pocket
The map/storage pockets are located on each door
behind a cover.
Floor Mats
Your vehicle’s floor mats are specially designed to
remain in position under your feet and out of reach of
the accelerator pedal. The driver’s side floor mat is held
in place by two snaps and the passenger’s side is
held in place by one.
How to Remove and Replace the
Floor Mats
To remove the floor mats,
pull up on the rear of the
mat to disconnect from
the snaps.
Be sure that the driver’s side floor mat is properly
placed on the floor so that it does not block the
movement of the accelerator pedal.
To reinstall the floor mats, line up the openings in the
floor mat over the snaps and push down into place.
2-43
Rear Storage Area
To install the cargo divider, snap the bottom of the
divider onto the snaps (B) located on the floor of the
trunk. Then, swing the divider up and place the pins on
each side of the divider into the notches (A) on either
side of the trunk.
There is also a storage compartment located in the
trunk on the passenger’s side.
To access the storage compartment, unsnap the lid.
To reinstall the lid, line up the opening in the lid over the
snap and push down into place.
Convenience Net
Your vehicle is equipped with a convenience net.
The convenience net attaches to the floor of the trunk.
Put small loads, like grocery bags, behind the net.
There is a cargo divider located in the trunk to keep
cargo from getting in the way of the retractable hardtop.
The cargo divider must be in place for the top to move.
2-44
The net is not for larger, heavier loads. Store them in
the trunk as far forward as you can. When not using the
net, hook the net to the tabs securing it to the sill plate.
Retractable Hardtop
Lowering the Retractable Hardtop
The following procedures explain the proper operation
of the retractable hardtop. The retractable hardtop
will not operate if the valet lockout switch is on.
Notice: Leaving the retractable hardtop down and
exposing the interior of your vehicle to outdoor
conditions may cause damage. Always close
the retractable hardtop if leaving your vehicle
outdoors.
If the retractable hardtop is lowered or raised multiple
times, the engine should be running while doing so
to prevent drain on the vehicle’s battery.
{CAUTION:
Moving parts of the retractable hardtop can
be dangerous. People can be injured by the
hardtop and its mechanism. Keep people away
from your vehicle when you are lowering or
raising the top.
1. Park on a level surface and shift the transmission
into PARK (P).
2. The vehicle’s engine must be on or in ACC.
3. Lower both sun visors.
Notice: Raising or lowering the top while the vehicle
is in motion can cause damage to the top or top
mechanism. Make sure the vehicle is in PARK (P) to
lower or raise the top.
Notice: Lowering the top if it is damp, wet, or dirty
can cause stains, mildew, and damage to the inside
of your vehicle. Dry off the top before lowering it.
Notice: If you lower the retractable hardtop in cold
weather (0°F/−18°C or lower), you may damage
top components. Do not lower the retractable
hardtop in cold weather.
2-45
4. Make sure that nothing or no one is on or around
the top. Make sure the trunk cargo cover is in
place with nothing on top or in front of the cargo
cover. See Rear Storage Area on page 2-44
for more information. Also, make sure the valet
lockout switch is off.
5. Push and hold the
bottom of the retractable
hardtop button located
on the console behind
the shifter lever.
The windows will
automatically lower and
the top will automatically
lower into the storage
area. A chime will sound
when the top has
lowered completely.
If the radio is on, the sound may be muted briefly while
the retracable top is lowered. This occurs because a
new audio system equalization is being loaded.
Under certain conditions, the Driver Information Center
(DIC) may display a message regarding the retractable
hardtop. If this happens, see DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-64 for more information.
2-46
Raising the Retractable Hardtop
1. Park on a level surface. Shift the transmission into
PARK (P).
2. The vehicle’s engine must be on or in ACC.
3. Lower both sun visors.
Notice: Raising or lowering the top while the vehicle
is in motion can cause damage to the top or top
mechanism. Make sure the vehicle is in PARK (P) to
lower or raise the top.
4. Make sure nothing or no one is on or around the
top. Make sure the trunk cargo cover is in place
with no cargo on top of or in front of the cargo
cover. See Rear Storage Area on page 2-44 for
more information. Also, be sure the valet lockout
switch is off.
5. Push and hold the top of
the retractable hardtop
button located behind the
shift lever. The windows
will automatically lower
and the top will raise.
A chime will sound
when the top has
raised completely.
After the top is fully raised, release the retractable
hardtop button. If you press the button again within five
seconds, the windows will automatically close.
If your radio is on, you may notice a brief mute in
sound. This is normal and due to a new audio system
equalization being loaded for the vehicle with the
top raised.
If your vehicle has a power loss, such as a dead
battery, you can still raise the top manually by doing
the following:
1. Lower both sun visors and open both doors.
2. Use the key to open the trunk. See Keys on page 2-2
and Trunk on page 2-13 for more information.
3. Raise the trunk by hand.
4. Remove the wrench located inside the passenger’s
side storage compartment.
5. Find the hydraulic pump
under the carpet on the
rear driver’s side of
the trunk. Open the
valve by turning it
counterclockwise with
your hand until it stops.
Under certain conditions, the Driver Information Center
(DIC) may display a message regarding the retractable
hardtop. If this happens, see DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-64 for more information.
2-47
Notice: Pressing the retractable hardtop button
when the hydraulic pump valve is open could
damage the pump. Always close the hydraulic pump
valve after the retractable hardtop has been closed
manually.
7. Move the rear tonneau rearward and up to the
stored position. Pull from the center of the
tonneau to keep pressure even. The rubber bumper
on each corner will fit against the underside of
the trunk decklid.
6. Pull both sides of the rear tonneau over-center link
down to unlock the linkage.
2-48
8. Push both sides of the rear tonneau over-center link
up until they stop to lock the linkage.
9. Close the hydraulic pump valve by turning it
clockwise with your hand until it stops.
10. Remove the upright center storage compartment.
Use the wrench to remove the four screws holding
the storage area in place.
2-49
11. Reach behind the square hole and push the front
tonneau over-center link up. The front tonneau
should pull up easily. If it does not, push the
over-center link up more.
2-50
12. Manually move the front tonneau to the open
position. Once the front tonneau is open, fold
the side wings in by gently pressing them in. Do not
force the wings. If they are hard to move, make
sure the front tonneau is open all the way.
13. Reach in from the side of the vehicle and under the
top to remove the headliner plug. The plug will be
located in the center of the top near the front.
14. Insert the wrench into the bolt beneath the plug
location. Turn the wrench about one-quarter turn
counterclockwise until it stops while gently pulling up
on the center of the top to release it.
15. Hold the top in the front and side and lift the top out
of the stored position.
2-51
16. Hold the top in the front and the rear and lift the top
until it is almost closed. Be careful not to pinch
your fingers between the rear of the top and the
rear window.
2-52
17. Place your hands on the top and guide the top into
the closed position.
19. While holding the rear
of the top down, insert
the wrench into the
bolt in the plug opening
in the headliner.
Turn the wrench
counterclockwise until it
stops to fully open
the latch jaws around
the pins.
18. While sitting in the driver’s seat, pull down on the
rear of the top.
20. Pull down on the roof with the latch rotated open.
Turn the wrench clockwise until it stops to lock the
top into position. Push up on the roof. If it moves
away from the windshield header it is not latched
and you will need to repeat the previous steps.
2-53
Vehicle Personalization
Memory Seat, Mirrors and
Steering Wheel
21. From outside the vehicle, push down on both rear
corners of the top to make sure it is completely
locked into place.
22. From inside the vehicle, reach behind the headrest
and gently pull the wings out a small amount. Then,
fold the front tonneau to the closed position.
23. Manually close the trunk.
2-54
Your vehicle is equipped with the memory package.
The controls for these features are located on the
driver’s seat, and are used to program and recall
memory settings for the driver’s seating positions.
Use the following steps to program each button:
1. Adjust the driver’s seat including the seatback
recliner, lumbar and head restraint, both outside
mirrors and the steering wheel to a comfortable
position.
2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps are heard,
then release the button.
Two personalized exit positions can be set by first
recalling the driving position (by pressing 1 or 2), then
positioning the steering wheel and seat in the desired
exit positions and then pressing and holding the
exit button until two beeps are heard. The exit button is
located between buttons 1 and 2. With the vehicle in
PARK (P), the exit position for the previously set driver
can be recalled by pressing the exit button.
A second mirror, seating and steering wheel position
can be programmed by repeating the above steps and
pressing button 2 (for driver 2). Each time a memory
button is pressed and released, a single beep will sound.
Each time button 1 or 2 is pressed and released while
the vehicle is in PARK (P), the memory positions will be
recalled after a brief delay. If the vehicle is not in
PARK (P), three beeps will be heard and the memory
position will not be recalled.
When you use the keyless access transmitter to unlock
your vehicle, automatic seat and steering wheel
movement to the exit position may occur. The numbers
on the back of the transmitter, 1 and 2, corresponds
to the numbers on the memory buttons.
When the engine is started, the seat, mirrors, and
steering wheel may automatically adjust to their
programmed positions.
For programming information, see DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-73.
Further programming for automatic seat and mirror
movement can be done using the Driver Information
Center (DIC).
To stop recall movement of the memory feature at any
time, press one of the power seat controls, power
mirror control buttons, memory buttons, or power
steering column control.
2-55
✍ NOTES
2-56
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6
Horn .............................................................3-6
Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering
Column ......................................................3-7
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-8
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-8
Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-9
Windshield Wipers ..........................................3-9
Rainsense™ Wipers ......................................3-10
Windshield Washer .......................................3-12
Headlamp Washer ........................................3-12
Cruise Control ..............................................3-12
Adaptive Cruise Control .................................3-16
Exterior Lamps .............................................3-28
Wiper Activated Headlamps ............................3-29
Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-29
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-30
Fog Lamps ..................................................3-31
Twilight Sentinel® ..........................................3-31
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ........................3-32
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-32
Courtesy Lamps ...........................................3-33
Entry/Exit Lighting .........................................3-33
Reading Lamps ............................................3-33
Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-33
Head-Up Display (HUD) .................................3-34
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ............3-37
Accessory Power Outlets ...............................3-38
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ........................3-39
Climate Controls ............................................3-40
Dual Climate Control System ..........................3-40
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-45
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...................3-45
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-46
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-46
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-48
Trip Odometer ..............................................3-48
Tachometer .................................................3-48
Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-48
Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-49
Airbag Off Light ............................................3-50
Voltmeter Gage ............................................3-51
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-52
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-53
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light ......3-53
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-54
Tire Pressure Light .......................................3-55
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-55
Engine Oil Pressure Gage .............................3-58
3-1
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Security Light ...............................................3-59
Fog Lamp Light ............................................3-59
Lights On Reminder ......................................3-59
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-59
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-60
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-61
DIC Controls and Displays .............................3-61
DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-64
Other Messages ...........................................3-72
DIC Vehicle Personalization ............................3-73
3-2
Trip Computer ................................................3-77
Oil Life Indicator ...........................................3-77
Audio System(s) .............................................3-78
Theft-Deterrent Feature ..................................3-78
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .......................3-79
Radio Reception ...........................................3-80
Care of Your CDs .........................................3-80
Care of Your CD Player ................................3-80
Diversity Antenna System ..............................3-81
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............3-81
✍ NOTES
3-3
Instrument Panel Overview
3-4
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
A. Head-Up Display (HUD) Controls/Instrument Panel
Brightness Controls. See Head-Up Display (HUD) on
page 3-34 or Instrument Panel Brightness on
page 3-32.
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
C. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 3-46.
D. Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever. See “Windshield
Wipers” under Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
on page 3-7.
E. Driver Information Center (DIC) Controls/Interior
Lamps. See DIC Controls and Displays on
page 3-61.
F. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-45.
G. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 3-6.
H. Voice Commands/Audio Controls. See OnStar®
System on page 2-36 or Audio Steering Wheel
Controls on page 3-79.
I. Adaptive Cruise Controls. See “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)” under Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
on page 3-7.
J. Horn. See Horn on page 3-6.
K. Audio Steering Wheel Controls. See Audio Steering
Wheel Controls on page 3-79.
L. Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positions on page 2-22.
M. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission Operation
on page 2-25.
N. Traction Control Button. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 5-8.
O. Passenger Airbag Off Indicator. See Airbag Off Light
on page 3-50.
P. Retractable Hardtop Button. See Retractable
Hardtop on page 2-45.
Q. Cupholders. See Cupholder(s) on page 2-42.
R. Cigarette Lighter. See Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
on page 3-39.
S. Climate Controls. See Dual Climate Control System
on page 3-40.
T. Audio/Navigation System. See Navigation System
Overview on page 4-2.
U. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-42.
3-5
Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
The hazard warning
flasher button is located
near the center of the
instrument panel.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
mode the ignition is in, even if the ignition is turned off.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn
signal lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals will not work.
3-6
Horn
Press near or on the horn symbols on your steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic
Steering Column
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
The power tilt wheel
control is located on the
outboard side of the
steering column.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
• G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. See Turn and
To operate the power tilt feature, push the control up
and the steering wheel will tilt up. Push the control down
and the steering wheel will go down.
Push the control forward and the steering wheel moves
toward the front of the vehicle. Push the control
rearward and the steering wheel moves toward the rear
of the vehicle. To set the memory position, see DIC
Vehicle Personalization on page 3-73 and Memory Seat,
Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 2-54.
Lane-Change Signals on page 3-8.
• 3 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8.
• - Fog Lamps. See Fog Lamps on page 3-31.
• Flash-to-Pass Feature. See Flash-to-Pass on
page 3-9.
• I Cruise Control. See Cruise Control on
page 3-12.
• P Exterior Lamps Control. See Exterior Lamps on
page 3-28.
3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
Turn Signal on Chime
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
A chime will remind you if you leave the turn signal on
for more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km) of driving.
To signal a turn, move the multifunction lever all the
way up or down. When the turn is finished, the lever will
return automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself
when you release it.
If you signal a turn or a lane change and the arrows
flash faster than normal, a signal bulb may be burned
out. Other drivers will not see the turn signal.
Replace burned-out bulbs to help avoid possible
accidents. If the arrows do not go on at all when you
signal a turn, check the fuses and check for burned-out
bulbs. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 6-80.
3-8
If you need to leave the turn signal on for more than
3/4 mile (1.2 km), turn off the signal and then turn it
back on.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low beam to high,
push the turn signal lever all the way forward.
When the high beams are
on, this light on the
instrument panel cluster
also will be on. To change
the headlamps from
high to low, pull the lever
rearward.
Flash-to-Pass
Windshield Wipers
This feature lets you use the high-beam headlamps to
signal the driver in front of you that you want to
pass. Pull and hold the turn signal lever toward you to
use. When you do, the following will occur:
• If the low-beam headlamps are on, the high-beam
headlamps will turn on. They will stay on as long
as you hold the lever there. Release the lever
to turn them off.
• If the headlamps are on high-beam, they will switch
to low-beam. To return to high beam, push the
lever away from you.
Use the lever located on the right side of the steering
column to operate the windshield wipers.
1(High Speed):
Move the lever to this position for
steady wiping at high speed.
6(Low Speed): Move the lever to this position for
steady wiping at low speed.
3-9
&(Delay):
Move the lever to this position to activate
the Rainsense™ function. Adjustments in this region
change the sensitivity of the Rainsense™ system.
9(Off): Move the lever to this position to turn off the
windshield wipers.
8(Mist):
Move the lever all the way down to mist and
release for a single wiping cycle. The windshield
wipers will stop after one wipe. If you want more wipes,
hold the band on mist longer.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wipers. If this
occurs, a circuit breaker will stop the wipers until the
motor cools. So, be sure to clear any ice and snow from
the windshield wiper blades before using them. If the
wiper blades are frozen to the windshield, carefully
loosen them or warm the windshield before turning the
wipers on. If your blades do become worn or
damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
3-10
Rainsense™ Wipers
Your vehicle has Rainsense™ wipers. The moisture
sensor for this feature is mounted on the interior side of
the windshield below the rearview mirror and is used
to automatically operate the wipers by monitoring
the amount of moisture build-up on the windshield.
Wipes occur as needed to clear the windshield
depending on driving conditions and the sensitivity
setting. In light rain or snow, fewer wipes will occur. In
heavy rain or snow, wipes will occur more frequently.
The Rainsense™ wipers operate in a delay mode
as well as a continuous low or high speed as needed. If
the system is left on for long periods of time, occasional
wipes may occur without any moisture on the
windshield. This is normal and indicates that the
Rainsense™ system is activated.
The Rainsense™ system is also sensitive to vibration.
The system may activate if something hits the
windshield or if the vehicle hits a bump.
The Rainsense™ system can be activated by moving
the wiper lever up to the delay position and turning
the delay adjust band to one of the five sensitivity levels.
The bottom delay adjust position is the lowest sensitivity
setting, level one. This allows more rain or snow to
collect on the windshield between wipes. Turning the
delay adjust band away from you to the higher sensitivity
levels allows less rain or snow to collect on the
windshield between wipes.
The mist and wash cycles operate as normal and are not
affected by the Rainsense™ function. The Rainsense™
system can be overridden at any time by manually
changing the wiper control to low or high speed.
The top position is the highest sensitivity setting, level
five. A single wipe will occur each time you turn the
delay adjust band to a higher sensitivity level to indicate
that the sensitivity level has been increased.
Notice: Do not place stickers or other items on the
exterior glass surface directly in front of the
moisture sensor. Doing this could cause the
moisture sensor to malfunction.
When Rainsense™ is active, the headlamps will turn on
automatically. If it is dark, they will remain on. See
“Wiper-Activated Headlamps” under Exterior Lamps on
page 3-28 for more information.
Notice: Going through an automatic car wash with
the wipers on can damage them. Turn the wipers
off when going through an automatic car wash.
3-11
Windshield Washer
Headlamp Washer
K(Washer Fluid):
Every fourth time the windshield washer button is
pressed, washer fluid will clean the headlamps.
The lever on the right side of the
steering column also controls the windshield washer.
There is a button at the end of the lever. To spray
washer fluid on the windshield, press the button and
hold it. The washer will spray until you release the
button. The wipers will continue to clear the window for
about six seconds after the button is released and
then stop or return to your preset speed.
Cruise Control
Your vehicle is equipped
with cruise control.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
If the fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir is
low, the message LOW WASHER FLUID will appear on
the Driver Information Center (DIC) display. It will
take 60 seconds after the bottle is refilled for this
message to turn off. For information on the correct
washer fluid mixture to use, see Windshield Washer
Fluid on page 6-32 and Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 7-11.
3-12
9(Off): This position turns the system off.
R(On):
This position activates the system.
+ (Resume/Accelerate): Move the lever to this symbol
to make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a
previously set speed.
T(Set):
Press this button to set the speed.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
Cruise control will not work if your parking brake is set,
or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.
If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel spinning,
and you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system (if equipped) begins to limit wheel spin,
the cruise control will automatically disengage. See
Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5-8. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may
turn cruise control back on.
3-13
Setting Cruise Control
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course,
disengages the cruise control. But you don’t need to
reset it.
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
1. Move the cruise control switch to on.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The cruise symbol on the
instrument panel will
illuminate when the cruise
control is engaged.
3-14
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you
can move the cruise control switch briefly from on to
resume/accelerate.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate the vehicle
will keep going faster until you release the switch or
apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster, don’t
hold the switch at resume/accelerate.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the set button at the end of the lever,
then release the button and the accelerator
pedal. You’ll now cruise at the higher speed. If the
accelerator pedal is held longer than 60 seconds,
cruise control will turn off.
• Move the cruise switch from on to
resume/accelerate. Hold it there until you get up to
the speed you want, and then release the switch.
To increase your speed in very small amounts,
move the switch briefly to resume/accelerate. Each
time you do this, your vehicle will go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
• Press and hold the set button until you reach the
lower speed you want, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press
the set button. Each time you do this, you’ll go
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may want to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to
a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,
applying the brake takes you out of cruise control. Many
drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t use
cruise control on steep hills.
3-15
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal
• Move the cruise control switch to off
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your
cruise control set speed memory is erased.
Adaptive Cruise Control
If your vehicle has this feature, be sure to read this
entire section before using it.
The system operates on a radio frequency subject to
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
3-16
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Adaptive Cruise Control is an enhancement to traditional
cruise control and is not a safety system. It allows you to
keep cruise control engaged in moderate traffic
conditions without having to constantly reset your cruise
control. Adaptive Cruise Control uses radar to detect a
vehicle directly ahead in your path, within a distance of
328 ft (100 m), and operates at speeds above
25 mph (40 km/h). When it is engaged by the driver, the
system can apply limited braking or acceleration of the
vehicle, automatically, to maintain a selected follow
distance to the vehicle ahead. Braking is limited to
0.3 g’s (2.95 m/sec2) of deceleration, which is
comparable to moderate application of the vehicle’s
brakes. To disengage Adaptive Cruise Control, apply the
brake. If there is not a vehicle in your path, your vehicle
will react like traditional cruise control.
{CAUTION:
Adaptive Cruise Control will not apply hard
braking or bring the vehicle to a complete
stop. It will not respond to stopped vehicles,
pedestrians or animals. When you are
approaching a vehicle or object, Adaptive
Cruise Control may not have time to slow your
vehicle enough to avoid a collision. Your
complete attention is always required while
driving and you should be ready to take action
and apply the brakes. For more information,
see Defensive Driving on page 5-2.
{CAUTION:
• On winding roads, Adaptive Cruise Control
•
•
•
may not detect a vehicle ahead. You
could crash into a vehicle ahead of you.
Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control on
winding roads.
In heavy stop-and-go traffic, Adaptive
Cruise Control may not have time to slow
your vehicle enough to avoid a collision
because of the rapidly changing traffic
conditions. Do not use Adaptive Cruise
Control in heavy stop-and-go traffic.
On slippery roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel
spinning, and you could lose control. Do
not use cruise control on slippery roads.
When visibility is low, such as in fog, rain
or snow, Adaptive Cruise Control
performance is limited. There may not be
enough distance to adapt to the changing
traffic conditions. Do not use cruise
control when visibility is low.
3-17
Some of the Adaptive
Cruise controls are located
on the end of the
multifunction lever.
Engaging Adaptive Cruise Control With
the Set Button
{CAUTION:
9 (Off):
R (On):
This position turns the system off.
This position turns the system on.
S (Resume/Increase): Push the switch to this symbol
to make the vehicle resume to a previously set speed
or to increase the set speed when Adaptive Cruise
Control is already active.
T (Set/Decrease):
Press this button to set the
speed or to decrease the set speed when Adaptive
Cruise Control is already active.
3-18
If you leave your Adaptive Cruise Control
switch on when you are not using cruise, you
might hit a button and go into cruise when you
do not want to. You could be startled and even
lose control. Keep the Adaptive Cruise Control
switch off until you want to use cruise control.
{CAUTION:
If you operate Adaptive Cruise Control without
your Head-up Display (HUD) on and properly
adjusted, your Adaptive Cruise Control
settings will not be visible. You could forget
your settings and be startled by Adaptive
Cruise Control response and even lose control.
Keep your HUD on and properly adjusted when
using Adaptive Cruise Control.
The set speed is selected by the driver. This is the
speed you will travel if there is not a vehicle detected in
your path.
To set Adaptive Cruise Control, do the following:
1. Make sure the Head-Up Display (HUD) is on and
properly adjusted. See Head-Up Display (HUD) on
page 3-34 for more information.
2. Move the switch to on.
3. Get up to the speed you want.
4. Press in the set button at the end of the lever and
release it.
5. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Once Adaptive Cruise Control is set, it may immediately
apply the brakes if it detects a vehicle ahead is too
close or moving slower than your vehicle.
This symbol will appear on
the Head-Up Display
(HUD) to indicate that
Adaptive Cruise Control is
active. See Head-Up
Display (HUD) on
page 3-34 for more
information.
Make sure the set speed is visible on the HUD so you
know the speed your vehicle will accelerate to if a
vehicle is not detected in your path. Keep in mind speed
limits, surrounding traffic speeds and weather conditions
when adjusting your set speed.
If your vehicle is in Adaptive Cruise Control when the
traction control system begins to limit wheel spin, the
Adaptive Cruise Control will automatically disengage.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5-8 and
StabiliTrak® System on page 5-10. When road conditions
allow you to safely use it again, you may turn the
Adaptive Cruise Control back on.
3-19
Increasing Set Speed While Using Adaptive
Cruise Control
Decreasing Set Speed While Using
Adaptive Cruise Control
There are two ways to increase the set speed:
Press in the set/decrease button on the end of the lever
until you reach the lower speed you want, then release it.
• Use the accelerator to get to the higher speed.
Press the set button at the end of the lever,
then release the button and the accelerator pedal.
You will now cruise at the higher speed.
• Move the Adaptive Cruise Control switch from on to
resume/increase. Hold it there until the desired set
speed is displayed in the HUD, then release the
switch. To increase your set speed in very
small amounts, move the switch briefly to
resume/increase. Each time you do this, your
vehicle set speed will increase by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Your vehicle will not reach the set speed until the system
determines there is not a vehicle in front of you. At that
point, your vehicle speed will increase to the set speed.
3-20
To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press the
set/decrease button. Each time you do this, your
set speed will be 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your Adaptive Cruise Control at a
desired speed and then you apply the brake. This will
disengage the Adaptive Cruise Control. But you do
not need to reset it.
Once you are going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
you can move the Adaptive Cruise Control switch briefly
from on to resume/increase. Adaptive Cruise Control
will be engaged with the previously chosen set speed.
Selecting the Follow Distance (GAP)
When the system detects a slower moving vehicle, it will
adjust your vehicle’s speed and maintain the follow
distance (gap) you select.
Use the GAP button on
the steering wheel to
adjust the follow distance.
Press the top of the button to increase the distance or
the bottom of the button to decrease the distance.
The first button press will show you the current follow
distance setting on the HUD. Your current follow
distance setting will be maintained until you change it.
There are six follow distances to choose from. The follow
distance selection ranges from near to far (1 second to
2 seconds follow time). The distance maintained for a
selected follow distance will vary based on vehicle speed.
The faster the vehicle speed the further back you will
follow. Consider traffic and weather conditions when
selecting the follow distance. The range of selectable
distances may not be appropriate for all drivers and
driving conditions. If you choose to travel at a distance
farther than Adaptive Cruise Control allows, disengage
the system and drive manually.
A graphic on the HUD indicates the selected follow
distance. This picture shows a maximum follow distance.
The vehicles will move closer as you select a smaller
follow distance.
3-21
Alerting the Driver
The alert symbol will flash
on the HUD and a warning
beep will sound when
driver action is required.
Driver action is required when:
• Adaptive Cruise Control cannot apply sufficient
braking because you are approaching a vehicle
too rapidly.
• The vehicle speed drops below about 20 mph
(32 km/h).
• A temporary condition prohibits Adaptive Cruise
Control from operating. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-64 for more information.
• A malfunction is detected in the system. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-64 for more
information.
See Defensive Driving on page 5-2 for more information.
3-22
{CAUTION:
Adaptive Cruise Control has only limited
braking ability to slow your vehicle. In some
cases, Adaptive Cruise Control may not have
time to slow your vehicle enough to avoid a
collision. Be ready to take action and apply
the brakes yourself. See Defensive Driving
on page 5-2.
Approaching and Following a Vehicle
The vehicle ahead symbol
will only appear on the
HUD when a vehicle ahead
is detected in your path.
If this symbol does not appear, or disappears briefly,
Adaptive Cruise Control will not respond to vehicles you
may see ahead.
{CAUTION:
When the Adaptive Cruise Control radar is
blocked by snow, ice, or dirt, it may not detect
a vehicle ahead. Adaptive Cruise Control may
not have time to slow your vehicle enough to
avoid a collision. Do not use Adaptive Cruise
Control when the radar is blocked by snow,
ice, or dirt. Keep your radar clean. See
“Cleaning the System” later in this section.
Adaptive Cruise Control will automatically slow your
vehicle down when approaching a slower moving
vehicle. It will then adjust your speed to follow the
vehicle in front at the selected follow distance. Your
speed will increase or decrease to follow the vehicle in
front of you but will not exceed the set speed. The
system may apply limited braking if necessary. When
braking is active, your brake lights will come on. It may
feel or sound different than if you were applying the
brakes yourself. This is normal.
3-23
Stationary or Very Slow-Moving Objects
{CAUTION:
Adaptive Cruise Control may not detect and
react to stationary or slow-moving vehicles or
other objects ahead of you. You could crash
into an object ahead of you. Do not use
Adaptive Cruise Control when approaching
stationary or slow-moving vehicles or other
objects.
Low-Speed Deactivation
If your speed falls below 20 mph (32 km/h) while
following a vehicle ahead, Adaptive Cruise Control will
begin to disengage. The driver alert symbol on the HUD
will flash and the warning beep will sound. The driver
must take action since Adaptive Cruise Control will
not slow the vehicle to a stop.
Passing a Vehicle
If you need to increase speed to pass a vehicle, use the
accelerator pedal. While your foot is on the accelerator
pedal, the system will not automatically apply the
brakes. Once you pass the vehicle and remove your
foot from the accelerator pedal, Adaptive Cruise Control
will return to normal operation and be able to apply
the brakes, if needed.
{CAUTION:
Adaptive Cruise Control may not detect and
react to stationary or slow-moving vehicles or
other objects ahead of you. Your vehicle may
accelerate toward objects, such as a stopped
vehicle that suddenly appears after the lead
vehicle changes lanes. Your complete attention
is always required while driving and you should
be ready to take action and apply the brakes.
3-24
{CAUTION:
If you rest your foot on the accelerator pedal,
the system will not automatically apply the
brakes. You could crash into a vehicle ahead
of you. Do not rest your foot on the accelerator
pedal when using Adaptive Cruise Control.
Curves in the Road
{CAUTION:
Due to Adaptive Cruise Control limitations in
curves, it may respond to a vehicle in another
lane, or may not have time to react to a vehicle
in your lane. You could crash into a vehicle
ahead of you, or lose control of your vehicle.
Give extra attention in curves and be ready to
use the brakes if necessary. Select an
appropriate speed while driving in curves.
Adaptive Cruise Control may operate differently in a
sharp curve.
The system may reduce your speed in a curve if the
curve is too sharp. The TIGHT CURVE message will also
display on the HUD. See Head-Up Display (HUD) on
page 3-34 for more information.
When following a vehicle and entering a curve, Adaptive
Cruise Control could lose track of the vehicle in your
lane and accelerate your vehicle. When this happens,
the vehicle ahead symbol will not appear on the HUD.
3-25
Highway Exit Ramps
{CAUTION:
Adaptive Cruise Control may lose track of the
vehicle ahead and accelerate up to your set
speed while entering or on highway exit
ramps. You could be startled by this
acceleration and even lose control of the
vehicle. Disengage Adaptive Cruise Control
before entering a highway exit ramp. Do not
use Adaptive Cruise Control on exit ramps.
Adaptive Cruise Control may detect a vehicle that is not
in your lane and apply the brakes.
Adaptive Cruise Control may, occasionally, provide a
driver alert and/or braking that you consider unnecessary.
It could respond to signs, guardrails and other stationary
objects when entering or exiting a curve. This is normal
operation. Your vehicle does not need service.
3-26
Other Vehicle Lane Changes
When going downhill, you may have to brake to keep
your speed down. Applying the brake disengages
the system. You may choose not to use Adaptive Cruise
Control on steep hills.
Disengaging Adaptive Cruise Control
If another vehicle enters the same lane as you, Adaptive
Cruise Control will not detect the vehicle until it is
completely in the lane. Be ready to take action and apply
the brakes yourself.
Using Adaptive Cruise Control on Hills
To disengage the system, apply the brake pedal or
move the Adaptive Cruise Control switch to off. Adaptive
Cruise Control information will not appear on the HUD
when the system is not engaged.
Erasing Set Speed Memory
When you turn the Adaptive Cruise Control switch or
the ignition off, the set speed memory is erased.
Other Messages
There are three messages that may appear in the
Driver Information Center (DIC). They are SERVICE
RADAR CRUISE, CRUISE NOT READY and CLEAN
RADAR CRUISE. These messages will only appear
to indicate a problem if Adaptive Cruise Control is active.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-64 for
more information.
How well Adaptive Cruise Control will work on hills
depends on your speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions
and the steepness of the hills. It may not detect a
vehicle in your lane while driving on hills. When going
up steep hills, you may want to use the accelerator
pedal to maintain your speed.
You may also see CRUISE SPEED LIMITED displayed
in the HUD. See Head-Up Display (HUD) on page 3-34
for more information.
3-27
Cleaning the System
The radar can become blocked by snow, ice or dirt. If so,
you may need to turn off the engine and clean the lens.
To clean the inside of the fascia lens and radar lens,
insert a screwdriver or similar object into one of the small
slots on the inboard side of the lens and pop the lens out.
Clean the surface with a 50/50 mixture of isopropyl
alcohol and water on a dampened cloth. After cleaning
the lens, set the lens back in place and press until it
snaps in.
Exterior Lamps
The lens is located on the driver’s side of the front fascia.
Clean the surface with a 50/50 mixture of isopropyl
alcohol and water on a dampened cloth. After cleaning
the fascia lens, try to engage Adaptive Cruise Control. If
this does not fix the problem, you may have to remove
the fascia lens and clean the inside of the fascia lens and
radar lens.
The exterior lamp control is located to the left of the
steering wheel on the multifunction lever.
O (Exterior Lamp Control):
Turn the band with this
symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.
3-28
The exterior lamp band has four positions:
Wiper Activated Headlamps
O (Off): Turning the band to this position turns off
all lamps.
This feature activates the headlamps and parking lamps
after the windshield wipers have been in use for
approximately six seconds.
AUTO (Automatic): Turning the band to this position
sets the exterior lamps in automatic mode. AUTO mode
will turn the exterior lamps on and off depending on
how much light is available outside the vehicle.
To override AUTO mode, turn the control to off.
To reset to AUTO mode turn the control to exterior
lamps and then back to AUTO. Automatic mode will also
reset when your vehicle is turned off and then back
on again when the control is left in the AUTO position.
; (Parking Lamp):
Turning the band to this position
turns on the parking lamps together with the following:
• Sidemarker Lamps
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
When the exterior lamp control has been turned off or is
in the parking lamp position and the wiper control is
on delay, low speed or high speed, the HEADLAMPS
SUGGESTED message will appear on the Driver
Information Center (DIC).
When the ignition is turned off, the wiper-activated
headlamps will immediately turn off.
Headlamps on Reminder
A warning chime will sound if the exterior lamp control
is left on in either the headlamp or parking lamp position
and the driver’s door is opened with the ignition off.
The parking brake indicator light will come on and stay
on when the parking lamps are on with the engine
off and the ignition to ACC.
5 (Headlamps):
Turning the control to this position
turns on the headlamps, together with the previously
listed lamps and lights.
3-29
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
The DRL system will make the front turn signal lamps
come on when the following conditions are met:
• It is still daylight and the ignition is on,
• the exterior lamp control is in the off position and
• the transmission is not in PARK (P).
When DRL are on, only the front turn signal lamps will
be on. No other exterior lamps such as the parking
lamps, taillamps, etc. will be on when the DRL are being
used. Your instrument panel will not be lit up either.
When it is dark enough outside, the front turn signal
lamps will turn off and normal low-beam headlamps will
turn on.
3-30
When it is bright enough outside, the regular lamps will
go off, and the front turn signal lamps will take over.
If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once
you leave the garage, it will take approximately
one minute for the automatic headlamp system to
change to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay,
your instrument panel cluster may not be as bright
as usual. Make sure your instrument panel brightness
knob is in the full bright position. See Instrument
Panel Brightness on page 3-32 for more information.
If it is dark enough outside and the exterior lamp control
is off, a HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message will
display on the Driver’s Information Center (DIC). This
message informs the driver that turning on the exterior
lamps is recommended.
Turning the exterior lamp control to off a second time,
or turning on the headlamps will remove the
HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message. If the parking
lamps or the fog lamps were turned on instead,
the HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message will continue
to be displayed.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
Fog Lamps
Twilight Sentinel®
Use fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty
conditions.
Twilight Sentinel® can turn your lamps on and off for you.
A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes the
Twilight Sentinel® work, so be sure it is not covered.
The fog lamps control is located on the multifunction
lever next to the exterior lamp control.
-(Fog Lamps): Turning the band to this position will
turn the fog lamps on.
When you turn the fog lamps on, the fog lamp light will
appear on the instrument panel cluster to indicate
that the fog lamps and the parking lamps are on.
If you turn the high-beam headlamps on, the fog lamps
will turn off. They will turn on again when you switch
to low-beam headlamps.
The ignition must be on for the fog lamps to operate.
With Twilight Sentinel® you will see the following
happen:
• When it is dark enough outside, the front turn signal
lamps (DRL) will go off, and the headlamps and
parking lamps will come on. The other lamps
that come on with headlamps will also come on.
• When it is bright enough outside, the headlamps
will go off, and the front turn signal lamps (DRL)
will come on, as long as the exterior lamp switch is
in the AUTO position.
If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once
you leave the garage, it will take approximately
one minute for the automatic headlamp system to
change to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay,
your instrument panel cluster may not be as bright
as usual. Make sure your instrument panel brightness
control is in full bright position. See Instrument Panel
Brightness on page 3-33 for more information.
3-31
You can idle the vehicle with the lamps off, even when
it is dark outside. After starting the vehicle, turn the
exterior lamp control band to off, then release it.
The lamps will remain off until you turn the control band
to off again.
Twilight Sentinel® also provides exterior illumination as
you leave the vehicle. If Twilight Sentinel® has turned
on the lamps when you turn off the ignition, your lamps
will remain on until:
• The exterior lamp switch is moved from OFF to the
parking lamp position, or
• a delay time that you select has elapsed.
See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-61 to
select the delay time that you want. You can also select
no delay time.
If you turn off the ignition with the exterior lamp switch
in the parking lamp or headlamp position, the Twilight
Sentinel® delay will not occur. The lamps will turn off as
soon as the switch is turned off.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
3-32
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver
If the manual parking lamps or headlamps have been left
on, the exterior lamps will turn off as soon as the ignition
is turned off or RAP is active. This protects against
draining the battery in case you have accidentally left the
headlamps or parking lamps on. The battery saver does
not work if the headlamps are turned on after the ignition
switch is turned to off.
If you need to leave the lamps on, use the exterior lamp
control to turn the lamps back on.
Instrument Panel Brightness
The button for this feature is located on the instrument
panel to the left of the steering column.
+!- (Brightness): Press this button to change the
brightness of the instrument panel lights.
Press the DIMMER button until PANEL DIMMING
appears on the Driver Information Center (DIC). Then
use the brightness button to adjust the instrument panel
brightness. Press the top of the button to brighten the
lights or the bottom of the button to dim the lights.
See Head-Up Display (HUD) on page 3-34 for more
information.
Be sure not to have the brightness turned all the way
down with the lamps on during the day. Your DIC
may not be visible.
Courtesy Lamps
Reading Lamps
When any door or the trunk lid is opened, the interior
lamps will go on unless it is bright outside.
Your inside rearview mirror includes two reading lamps.
The lamps will go on when a door is opened. When
the doors are closed, each lamp can be turned on
individually by pressing the button for that lamp.
You can also turn on the courtesy lamps by pressing
the interior lamp button on the right side of the
instrument panel cluster.
Entry/Exit Lighting
With entry lighting, the interior lamps will come on when
entering the vehicle. The interior lamps will come on
for about 20 seconds when the engine is turned off.
You can turn exit and entry lighting off by quickly turning
the courtesy lamps on and off.
Battery Run-Down Protection
Your vehicle has a feature to help prevent you from
draining the battery in case the underhood lamp, vanity
mirror lamps, cargo lamps, reading lamps, console
or glove box lamps are accidentally left on or in case
something is plugged into the accessory power outlet or
cigarette lighter. If you leave any of these lamps on,
they will automatically time-out after about 20 minutes.
To reset it, all of the above lamps must be turned
off or the ignition key must be in ON.
3-33
Head-Up Display (HUD)
{CAUTION:
• Check Gages Icon
• Adaptive Cruise Control Features and Indicators
• Radio Features
If the HUD image is too bright, or too high in
your field of view, it may take you more time to
see things you need to see when it is dark
outside. Be sure to keep the HUD image dim
and placed low in your field of view.
The Head-Up Display (HUD) allows you to see some of
the driver information that appears on your instrument
panel cluster.
The information may be displayed in English or metric
units and appears as an image focused out toward the
front of your vehicle. To change from English to metric
units, see Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-61.
The HUD consists of the following information:
•
•
•
•
Speedometer
Turn Signal Indicators
High-Beam Indicator Symbol
Tap-Up/Tap-Down Transmission Feature
3-34
Be sure to continue scanning your displays, controls
and driving environment just as you would in a vehicle
without HUD. If you never look at your instrument
panel cluster, you may not see something important,
such as a warning light. Under important warning
conditions, the CHECK GAGES message will display in
the HUD. View your Driver Information Center (DIC)
for more information.
The HUD controls are
located to the left of the
steering wheel.
To adjust the HUD so you can see it properly, do the
following:
1. Adjust the seat to a comfortable driving position. If
you change your seat position later, you may have
to re-adjust your HUD.
2. Start your engine and press the top or bottom
of the HUD button to center the HUD image in
your view.
The HUD image can only be adjusted up and down,
not side-to-side.
+!- (Brightness): This button is used to adjust the
brightness of the HUD and the instrument panel cluster.
DIMMER: This button is used to select the HUD or
the instrument panel cluster to adjust the brightness.
HUD: This button is used to adjust the vertical position
of the HUD display.
3. Press the DIMMER button until the DIC reads HUD
DIMMING. Then use the brightness button to adjust
the desired intensity.
The brightness of the HUD image is determined by the
light conditions in the direction your vehicle is facing
and where you have the HUD set. If you are facing a
dark object or a heavily shaded area, your HUD
may anticipate that you are entering a dark area and
may begin to dim.
To turn off the HUD, press the brightness button down
until the image disappears.
Polarized sunglasses could make the HUD image
harder to see.
3-35
As light shines out from the HUD, it is possible for light
to shine back in. In rare occurrences, when the sun
is at a specific angle and position, the sun’s rays can
shine back into the HUD. When this occurs, the display
device within the HUD will be temporarily illuminated.
The event will end when the vehicle’s angle to the
sun changes.
Keep in mind that your windshield is part of the HUD
system. If you ever have to have your windshield
replaced, be sure to get one that is designed for HUD
or your HUD image may look blurred and out of focus.
Clean the inside of the windshield as needed to remove
any dirt or film that reduces the sharpness or clarity
of the HUD image.
CRUISE SPEED LIMITED: This message indicates that
your vehicle speed has been reduced below your set
speed due to ACC limitations. Your set speed is too high
and ACC cannot detect other vehicles at far enough
distances for the system to operate properly.
To clean the HUD, spray household glass cleaner on a
soft, clean cloth. Wipe the HUD lens gently, then dry
it. Do not spray cleaner directly on the lens because the
cleaner could leak into the unit.
If the ignition is on and you cannot see the HUD image,
check to see if:
•
•
•
•
Something is covering the HUD unit.
The brightness is adjusted properly.
The HUD image is adjusted to the proper height.
Ambient light in the direction your vehicle is facing
is low.
• A fuse is blown. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 6-80.
3-36
The following Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
messages may appear in the HUD:
TIGHT CURVE: This message indicates that ACC has
reduced your vehicle speed due to a tight curve in the
road. Once the road straightens, ACC will return to your
selected set speed or follow distance setting. See
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” under Turn Signal/
Multifunction Lever on page 3-7 for more information.
You may also see an ACC active symbol, alert symbol
or vehicle ahead symbol. See “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)” under Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on
page 3-7 for more information.
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA)
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist can help you to
determine how close an object is to your rear bumper
within a given area, making parking easier.
The URPA display is
located inside the vehicle,
below the rear window.
It has three color-coded
lights that can be seen
through the rearview mirror
or by turning around.
{CAUTION:
Even with the Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist
system, the driver must check carefully before
backing up. The system does not operate above
typical backing speeds of 3 mph (5 km/h) while
parking. And, the system does not detect
objects that are more than 5 feet (1.5 meters)
behind the vehicle.
So, unless you check carefully behind you
before and when you back up, you could strike
children, pedestrians, bicyclists or pets behind
you, and they could be injured or killed.
How the System Works
URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is
moved into REVERSE (R) and the vehicle speed is less
than 3 mph (5 km/h). When the system comes on,
the three lights on the display will illuminate to let you
know that the system is working. URPA senses
how close your vehicle is to an object. The distance is
determined by the four ultrasonic sensors located on the
rear bumper.
Whether or not you are using rear park assist,
always check carefully behind your vehicle
before you back up and then watch closely as
you do.
3-37
When you shift into REVERSE (R) and an object is
detected, the following will occur in sequence depending
on the distance from the object:
• At 5 feet (1.5 m) a chime will sound and one amber
light will be lit;
• at 40 inches (1.0 m) both amber lights will be lit;
• at 20 inches (0.5 m) a continuous chime will sound
and all three lights (amber/amber/red) will be lit; and
• at 1 foot (0.3 m) a continuous chime will sound and
all three lights (amber/amber/red) will flash.
URPA can detect objects 3 inches (7.6 cm) and wider,
and at least 10 inches (25.4 cm) tall, but it cannot detect
objects that are above trunk level. In order for the
rear sensors to recognize an object, it must be within
operating range.
If the URPA system is not functioning properly, the
display will flash red, indicating that there is a problem.
The light will also flash red while driving if a trailer is
attached to your vehicle, or a bicycle or object is on the
back of, or hanging out of your trunk. The light will
continue to flash until the trailer or the object is
removed and your vehicle is driven forward at least
15 mph (25 km/h).
It may also flash red if the ultrasonic sensors are not
kept clean. So be sure to keep your rear bumper free of
mud, dirt, snow, ice and slush or materials such as
paint or the system may not work properly. If after
cleaning the rear bumper and driving forward at least
15 mph (25 km/h), the display continues to flash red, see
your dealer. For cleaning instructions, see Washing
Your Vehicle on page 6-74.
It may also flash red if your vehicle is moving in
REVERSE (R) at a speed greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).
Other conditions that may affect system performance
include things like the vibrations from a jackhammer or
the compression of air brakes on a very large truck.
As always, drivers should use care when backing up a
vehicle. Always look behind you, being sure to check
for other vehicles, obstructions and blind spots.
Accessory Power Outlets
The accessory power outlet can be used to connect
electrical equipment such as a cellular phone or
CB radio.
The accessory power outlet is located inside the center
console storage compartment, on the forward left side.
To use the outlet, remove the tethered cap. When not
using it, always cover the outlet with the protective cap.
3-38
Notice: When using an accessory power outlet,
maximum electrical load must not exceed 20 amps.
Always turn off any electrical equipment when
not in use. Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain your vehicle’s battery.
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer for additional information
on accessory power outlets.
Notice: If you put papers or other flammable items
in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage
your vehicle. Never put flammable items in the
ashtray.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Check with your
dealer before adding electrical equipment.
Loose objects, such as paper clips, can lodge behind
and beneath the ashtray lid and prevent movement
of the lid. You should avoid putting small, loose objects
near the ashtray.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
installation instructions included with the equipment.
We recommend that you see a qualified technician or
your dealer for the proper installation of your equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can
cause damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
The ashtray and cigarette lighter are located under a lid in
the front console to the right of the shift lever. Press the
left side of the lid and it will open automatically.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way and let
go. When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating. Do not
use anything other than the cigarette lighter in the
heating element.
3-39
Climate Controls
Dual Climate Control System
With this system you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation for your vehicle.
Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): When this button is pressed and
the temperature is set, the system will automatically
control the inside temperature, the air delivery mode, the
air-conditioning compressor and the fan speed. AUTO
will appear on the display.
1. Press the AUTO button.
When your vehicle is first started, the system will recall
the last temperature fan and mode settings for that driver.
3-40
2. Adjust the temperature to a comfortable setting
between 70°F (21°C) and 80°F (27°C).
Choosing the warmest or coldest temperature
setting will not cause the system to heat or cool any
faster. If you set the system at the warmest or
coldest temperature setting, the system will remain
in manual mode at that temperature and it will
not go into automatic mode.
In cold weather, the system will start at reduced fan
speeds to avoid blowing cold air into your vehicle
until warmer air is available. The system will
start out blowing air at the floor but may change
modes automatically as the vehicle warms up
to maintain the chosen temperature setting. The
length of time needed for warm up will depend on
the outside temperature and the length of time
that has elapsed since your vehicle was last driven.
3. Wait for the system to regulate. This may take from
10 to 30 minutes. Then adjust the temperature, if
necessary.
You can switch from English to metric units through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Controls
and Displays on page 3-61 for more information.
The air-conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of
water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling
or after turning off the engine. This is normal.
Do not cover the solar sensor located in the center of
the instrument panel, near the windshield. For more
information on the solar sensor, see “Sensors” later in
this section.
Manual Operation
w PWR x (Power/Temperature): Press the PWR
button on the left side of the climate control panel to turn
the entire climate control system on or off. Press the
up or down arrow on the switch to manually increase or
decrease the temperature inside the vehicle.
Press the PWR button on the right side of the climate
control panel to turn the passenger’s climate control
system on or off. Press the up or down arrow on
the switch to manually increase or decrease the
temperature for the passenger.
If the passenger’s PWR button is off, the driver’s
temperature switch controls the temperature for the
entire vehicle.
«9ª(Fan):
Press this switch to increase or
decrease the fan speed. Pressing this switch cancels
automatic operation and places the system in manual
mode. Press AUTO to return to automatic operation.
If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is at
the highest setting, the passenger compartment air filter
may need to be replaced. For more information, see
Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 3-45
and Scheduled Maintenance on page 7-4.
3-41
ªN« (Mode): Pressing the switch and changing the
mode cancels automatic operation and places the
system in manual mode. Press the AUTO button to
return to automatic operation.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
H (Vent):
This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
% (Bi-Level):
This mode directs approximately half of
the air to the instrument panel outlets, and then
directs most of the remaining air to the floor outlets.
In automatic operation, cooler air is directed to the upper
outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.
6 (Floor):
This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets with some air directed to the side window
outlets, and a little air directed to the windshield.
The mode switch can also be used to select the defog
mode. Information on defogging and defrosting can
be found later in this section.
A/C OFF (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn
off the air conditioning compressor. Press AUTO to
return to automatic operation. The compressor cannot
be turned off in either the defrost or floor/defog mode.
3-42
( (Heated/Cooled Seat):
Press this button to turn the
feature on. The button on the left controls the driver’s
seat and the button on the right controls the passenger’s
seat. Each press of the button will take you to a
different setting. The settings available in order are
HI HEAT, LO HEAT, OFF, HI COOL, LO COOL
and OFF. You will be able to feel the temperature
change in a few minutes.
The feature will automatically shut off when the vehicle
is turned off.
? (Recirculation):
Press this button to turn the
recirculation mode on or off. The air-conditioning
compressor also comes on. This mode keeps outside
air from coming in the vehicle. It can be used to prevent
outside air and odors from entering your vehicle or to
help cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly.
Recirculation is not available in defrost or
floor/defog mode.
Using recirculation for long periods of time may cause
the air inside your vehicle to become too dry. To prevent
this from happening, after the air in your vehicle has
cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.
Sensors
There are sensors to measure the temperature and
sun’s effect on passenger comfort.
The solar sensor on your vehicle monitors the solar
radiation then uses the information to maintain the
selected temperature when operating in AUTO mode by
initiating needed adjustments to the temperature, the
fan speed and the air delivery system. The system may
also supply cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing
the sun. The recirculation mode will also be activated, as
necessary. Do not cover the solar sensor located on
the top of the instrument panel near the windshield
or the system will not work properly.
There is also a sensor located behind the front bumper.
This sensor reads the outside air temperature and
helps maintain the temperature inside the vehicle. The
outside temperature will be displayed in the navigation
system only when the engine is running. Any cover
on the front of the vehicle could give a false reading of
the temperature.
If the outside temperature goes up, the display
temperature will not change until:
• The vehicle’s speed is above 10 mph (16 km/h) for
five minutes.
• The vehicle’s speed is above 32 mph (51 km/h) for
two and one-half minutes.
These delays prevent false readings. If the temperature
goes down, the outside temperature will be shown
when you start the vehicle. If it has been turned off for
less than three hours, the temperature will be recalled
from the previous vehicle operation.
There is also an inside temperature sensor located to
the left of the ignition button. The automatic climate
control system uses this sensor to receive information,
so if you block or cover it, the system will not function
properly.
3-43
Defogging and Defrosting
Rear Window Defogger
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This
can be minimized if the climate control system is used
properly. There are two modes to clear fog or frost from
your windshield. Use the floor/defog mode to clear the
windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers.
Use defrost to remove fog or frost from the windshield
more quickly.
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window.
- (Floor/Defog): Press the mode button until the
defog mode appears on the display. This mode directs
the air between the windshield, floor outlets and
side windows. When you select this mode, the system
turns off recirculation and runs the air-conditioning
compressor unless the outside temperature is near or
below freezing. The recirculation mode cannot be
selected while in the floor/defog mode.
1 (Defrost):
Press this button to direct most of the
air to the windshield, with some air directed to the
side windows. In this mode, the system will automatically
turn off the recirculation and run the air-conditioning
compressor, unless the outside temperature is near or
below freezing. Recirculation cannot be selected while in
the defrost mode. Do not drive the vehicle until all the
windows are clear.
3-44
The rear window defogger will only work when the
engine is running.
= (Rear Window Defogger): Press this button to
turn the rear window defogger on or off. Be sure to clear
as much snow from the rear window as possible.
The rear window defogger will turn off approximately
10 minutes after the button is pressed when traveling less
than 30 mph (48 km/h). If turned on again, the defogger
will only run for approximately five minutes before turning
off. The defogger can also be turned off by pressing the
button again or by turning off the engine.
The heated outside rearview mirrors will heat to help
clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirrors
when the rear window defogger is on.
The rear window defogger and heated mirrors are
automatically disabled when the retractable hardtop is
moving or down.
Notice: Don’t use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage
the warming grid, and the repairs wouldn’t be
covered by your warranty. Do not attach a temporary
vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similar to
the defogger grid.
Outlet Adjustment
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Use the thumbwheel to open or close the outlets.
The passenger compartment air filter removes certain
odor and particles from the air including pollen and dust
particles. Reductions in airflow, which may occur
more often in dusty areas, indicate that the filter may
need to be replaced early.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the area around the base of the instrument
panel console and air path under the seats clear
of objects to help circulate the air inside of
your vehicle more effectively.
The filter should be replaced as part of the routine
scheduled maintenance. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 7-4 for more information.
The passenger compartment air filter is located on the
passenger’s side of the engine compartment near
the battery. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 6-12 for more information on location.
To check or replace the air filter, do the following:
1. With the hood open, unlatch and remove the
access panel.
2. Pull the old filter out of the housing.
3. Insert the new filter into the housing. The filter should
be fully inserted with the arrows pointing up.
4. Reinstall the air filter access panel.
3-45
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they are working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there is a problem with your vehicle.
3-46
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly — and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They are a big help.
Your vehicle may also have a Driver Information Center
that works along with the warning lights and gages.
See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-61.
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster and Driver Information
Center (DIC) are designed to let you know at a glance
how the vehicle is running. You will know how fast
you are going, about how much fuel you have left and
many other things you will need to know to drive
safely and economically. The instrument panel cluster
indicator warning lights, gages and DIC messages
are explained on the following pages.
United States shown, Canada similar
3-47
Speedometer and Odometer
Tachometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in either
miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).
The tachometer displays the engine speed in thousands
of revolutions per minute (rpm).
There is only one scale for mph and km/h. Use the Driver
Information Center (DIC) controls to switch between mph
and km/h. See DIC Controls and Displays on page 3-61
for more information. The cluster will calculate the proper
speed and move the needle to the correct position. Either
the MPH or the km/h telltale will illuminate, depending on
which measurement you choose.
Fuel will shut off at about 6700 rpm.
The odometer is part of the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See DIC Controls and Displays on
page 3-61 for more information.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer is part of the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See DIC Controls and Displays on
page 3-61 for more information.
If you continue to drive your vehicle at the fuel shut off
rpm, you could damage your engine. Be sure to
operate your vehicle below the fuel shut off rpm or
reduce your rpm quickly when the fuel shuts off.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition is turned on, a chime will be provided
for several seconds to remind people to buckle their
safety belts. The driver safety belt light will also be
provided and stay on for several seconds, then it will flash
for several more. You should buckle your seat belt.
This chime and light will be
repeated if the driver
remains unbuckled and the
vehicle is in motion.
If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime nor the
light will be provided.
3-48
Airbag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows a deployed airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. The system check includes the airbag
modules, the wiring and the diagnostic module. For
more information on the airbag system, see Airbag
System on page 1-36.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. Then the
light should go out. This
means the system is ready.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle
serviced right away if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the vehicle on. If the light does
not come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to
warn you if there is a problem.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your
airbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
3-49
Airbag Off Light
{CAUTION:
If the passenger’s airbags are turned off for a
person who is not in a risk group identified by
the national government, that person will not
have the extra protection of the airbags. In a
crash, the airbags would not be able to inflate
and help protect the person sitting there. Do
not turn off the passenger’s airbags unless the
person sitting there is in a risk group. See
Airbag Off Switch on page 1-44 for more on
this, including important safety information.
When you turn the passenger’s airbags off, this light will
come on and stay on to remind you that the airbags have
been turned off. This light will go off when you turn the
airbags back on. See Airbag Off Switch on page 1-44 for
more on this, including important safety information.
3-50
Voltmeter Gage
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on
when you have turned off the airbags, it means
that something may be wrong with the airbag
system. The passenger’s airbags could inflate
even though the switch is off. If this ever
happens, do not let anyone whom the national
government has identified as a member of a
passenger airbag risk group sit in the
passenger’s position (for example, do not
secure a rear-facing child restraint in your
vehicle) until you have your vehicle serviced.
See Airbag Off Switch on page 1-44.
When the vehicle is in
accessory mode, the
voltmeter shows the
voltage output of your
battery. When the engine
is running, it shows
the voltage output of the
charging system.
The reading will change as the rate of charge changes
(with engine speed, for example), but if the voltmeter
reads at 9 volts or below, your instrument panel cluster
and other systems may shut down. The Driver
Information Center (DIC) will read LOW VOLTAGE
when your vehicle is at 10 volts or below. Have
it checked right away. Driving with the voltmeter reading
at 10 volts or below could drain your battery and
disable your vehicle.
3-51
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though,
you need both parts working well.
If the light comes on while you are driving and you have
a LOW BRAKE FLUID message showing on the DIC,
pull off the road and stop carefully. You may notice that
the pedal is harder to push. Or, the pedal may go
closer to the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light
is still on, have the vehicle towed for service. See
Towing Your Vehicle on page 5-35.
{CAUTION:
United States
Canada
This light should come on when you start the engine.
If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If this warning light stays on after you start the engine,
the parking brake may still be set or there could be
a brake problem. Refer to Parking Brake on page 2-28
to see if it is set. If the parking brake is not set, have
your brake system inspected right away.
3-52
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the light is still on after you
have pulled off the road and stopped carefully,
have the vehicle towed for service.
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
Light
With the anti-lock brake
system, the light will come
on when your engine is
started and may stay on for
several seconds. That is
normal.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
This light should come on
briefly as you start the
engine. If the light does not
come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to
warn you if there is a
problem.
If the light stays on, turn the ignition off. Or, if the light
comes on when you are driving, stop as soon as
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the light still stays on,
or comes on again while you are driving, your vehicle
needs service. If the regular brake system warning light
is not on, you still have brakes, but you do not have
anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system warning
light is also on, you do not have anti-lock brakes
and there is a problem with your regular brakes. See
“Service ABS” under DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-64.
The light will also come on while the StabiliTrak®
system warms up and the STABILITRAK WARMING
message will be displayed in the Driver Information
Center (DIC).
The anti-lock brake system warning light will come on
briefly when you turn the ignition on. This is normal.
If the light does not come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If the light stays on or comes on while you are driving, a
chime sounds and a SERVICE STABILITRAK message
appears on the DIC, there is a problem with your
StabiliTrak® and the vehicle needs service.
If it stays on, or comes on and the DIC shows a SERVICE
TRACTION SYS message when you are driving, there is
a problem with your TCS and your vehicle needs service.
When this light is on, the system will not limit wheel spin.
Adjust your driving accordingly. If the driver turns off TCS
by pressing the button on the console, the TCS system
light will come on and the TRACTION SYSTEM-OFF
message will show on the DIC.
3-53
You can acknowledge this message by pressing the
RESET button. When the SERVICE STABILITRAK
message is displayed, the StabiliTrak® system will not
assist you in controlling the vehicle. You should have the
system serviced as soon as possible. Adjust your
driving accordingly.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
When the system is working, you will see the
STABILITRAK ACTIVE message displayed in the DIC.
You may also feel of hear the system working. This
is normal.
If you turn off the StabiliTrak® system, by pressing the
front part of the button on the console for five seconds,
the traction control system light will come on, a
chime will sound and the TRAC/STABILITRAK OFF
message will be displayed in the DIC. The Traction
Control System will also be turned off. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-64 for more
information.
If the StabiliTrak® system and Traction Control System
are turned off, pressing the console button momentarily
will turn both systems on. The DIC will display the
TRAC/STABILITRAK ON message, the instrument
cluster light will be off and a chime will sound. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-64 for more
information.
3-54
United States
Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
As the pointer nears 260°F (125°C), your engine coolant
temperature is high. A message may display on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) depending on how high
the temperature is. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-64 for more information.
See Engine Overheating on page 6-23 for more
information.
Tire Pressure Light
This light should come on
briefly as you start the
engine. It will then come on
only when a flat or low
tire pressure condition
exists.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6-55 for
more information.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems.
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The CHECK ENGINE light comes on to
indicate that there is a problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system
before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more
serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after awhile, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not
be as good, and your engine may not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may
not be covered by your warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of
your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
3-55
This light should come on briefly, as a check to show
you it is working, as you start the engine. If the light
does not come on, have it repaired. This light will also
come on during a malfunction in one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has
been detected. A misfire increases vehicle
emissions and may damage the emission control
system on your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may
be required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
• Reducing vehicle speed
• Avoiding hard accelerations
• Avoiding steep uphill grades
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the engine off, wait at least 10 seconds and
restart the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still
flashing, follow the previous steps, and see your dealer
for service as soon as possible.
If the Light Is On Steady
You also may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See Filling Your Tank on page 6-7. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
Gasoline Octane on page 6-5. Poor fuel quality will
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
3-56
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has
the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems that may have
developed.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection
could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the CHECK
ENGINE light is on or not working properly.
To perform a Check Engine light bulb check with the
keyless ignition, make sure the transmitter fob is in the
passenger compartment. See Ignition Positions on
page 2-22. Press the bottom of the ACC button on the
instrument panel and hold the button down for five
seconds. The instrument panel, including the Check
Engine light, will light up and the ignition will be on, but
the engine will not start — if you press the bottom of
the ACC button only briefly, less than five seconds, the
accessory mode will be turned on, but not the ignition.
After the bulb check, be sure to press and release
the ACC button again to turn the ignition off and avoid
draining the vehicle’s battery.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
3-57
Engine Oil Pressure Gage
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
United States
Canada
The engine oil pressure gage shows the engine oil
pressure in psi (pounds per square inch) or kPa
(kilopascals) when the engine is running.
Oil pressure should be 20 to 80 psi (140 to 550 kPa).
In certain situations such as long, extended idles on hot
days, it could read as low as 6 psi (40 kPa) and still
be considered normal. It may vary with engine speed,
outside temperature and oil viscosity. The Driver
Information Center (DIC) may display messages
regarding the oil condition. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-64 and Engine Oil on page 6-13.
3-58
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
Security Light
Lights On Reminder
For information regarding
this light, see
Theft-Deterrent Systems
on page 2-19.
This light comes on
whenever the headlamps
are on.
United States Only
Fog Lamp Light
Highbeam On Light
The fog lamps light will
come on when the fog
lamps are in use.
The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off.
See Fog Lamps on page 3-31 for more information.
This light will illuminate
when the headlamp high
beams are in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8.
3-59
Fuel Gage
Your fuel gage tells you
about how much fuel you
have left when the
ignition is on.
Here are five things that some owners ask about. All
these things are normal and do not indicate that
anything is wrong with the fuel gage.
• At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before
the gage reads the full symbol.
• It takes more (or less) fuel to fill up than the gage
reads. For example, the gage reads half full, but it
took more (or less) than half of the tank’s
capacity to fit it.
• The gage pointer may move while cornering,
braking or speeding up.
• The gage may not indicate the tank is empty when
the ignition is turned off.
When the needle approaches the low fuel symbol, LOW
FUEL will appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC)
display. At this time, you still have a little fuel left, but
you should get more soon.
Press RESET to acknowledge a DIC message(s).
Pressing RESET will also turn off a DIC message but
the LOW FUEL message will come on again in
10 minutes if you have not added fuel to the vehicle.
3-60
• The gage reading may change slightly within the
first several minutes after starting the vehicle.
You can use the Driver Information Center (DIC) to
display more detailed fuel information. While scrolling
through the DIC, you will also find:
• AVERAGE XX.X MPG (Average Miles Per Gallon):
The fuel economy calculated for the last 20 gallons
(76 L) of fuel used, or since you last reset the display.
• INST XX.X MPG (Instantaneous Miles Per Gallon):
The fuel economy calculated for your current driving
conditions.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
This display gives you the status of many of your
vehicle’s systems. The DIC is also used to display driver
personalization features and warning/status messages.
All messages will appear in the DIC display, located
at the bottom of the instrument panel cluster.
DIC Controls and Displays
• RANGE XXX MI: The approximate distance you can
The Driver Information
Center (DIC) buttons are
located to the right of
the steering wheel on the
instrument panel, near
the air outlets.
drive before refueling.
See DIC Controls and Displays on page 3-61 for more
information.
You should reset the fuel information display every time
you refuel. To reset AVERAGE, use the information up or
down button to scroll to AVE FUEL ECON and hold the
reset button. RANGE will automatically reset.
« 4 ª (Information):
Press the top or bottom of this
button to scroll through the available features which
include the odometer, trip odometers, fuel range, miles
per gallon, average speed, timer, tire pressure and
remaining oil life.
3-61
+ (Interior Lamps): Press this button to turn the
interior lamps on and off.
OPTIONS: Press this button to choose personal
options that are available on your vehicle.
RESET: Press this button to reset a feature. It is also
used to switch between English and Metric options.
Use the information button to scroll through the following
options:
ODOMETER: This feature shows how far the vehicle
has been driven in either miles or kilometers. Use
the ENG/METRIC feature to switch between English
and Metric units.
TRIP A: This feature will record the distance traveled
since the last time it was reset. Press and hold the
RESET button to return to zero. If your vehicle is first
sold in the United States, the trip odometer will return to
zero after 999.9 miles (1 609 km). If your vehicle is
first sold in Canada, the trip odometer will return to zero
after 1,242 miles (1 999 km).
TRIP B: This feature allows you to record the distance
traveled during a second trip and functions the same
as TRIP A.
3-62
RANGE xxx MI: This feature shows about how many
miles you can drive without refilling your fuel tank. Once
the range drops below 40 miles (64 km) remaining,
the display will show LOW.
AVERAGE xx.x MPG (Average Miles Per Gallon): This
feature shows the approximate fuel economy you have
averaged since the last time you reset the value. To reset
the average miles per gallon, press the information button
to display AVERAGE xx.x MPG then press and hold the
RESET button until AVERAGE 00.0 MPG is displayed.
INST xx.x MPG (Instantaneous Miles Per
Gallon): This feature shows the instantaneous fuel
economy which varies with your driving conditions, such
as acceleration, braking and the grade of the road
being traveled. The RESET button does not function
in this mode.
AVERAGE SPEED: This feature shows the average
speed you have traveled at since the last time you reset
the value. To reset the value, press the information
button to display AVERAGE SPEED then press and hold
the RESET button until AVERAGE SPEED 00.0 is
displayed.
ELAPSED TIME: This feature is like a stopwatch, in
that you can clock the time it takes to get from one point
to another.
To operate, press the information button to display
ELAPSED TIME. Each of the fields for the hours,
minutes and seconds are two numeric digits.
Once ELAPSED TIME 00:00:00 is displayed, press the
RESET button to start the timing feature. Press the
RESET button again to stop it. If you will be starting and
stopping your vehicle, during a trip for instance, the
ELAPSED TIME feature will automatically start timing
where it left off when you last stopped. To reset it, press
and hold the RESET button until the display reads
ELAPSED TIME 00:00:00. Press the information button
to exit from the ELAPSED TIME display.
FRONT Lxx Rxx PSI: This feature shows the tire
pressure for the front left and right tires.
OIL LIFE: This feature shows the estimated oil life
remaining. Press the information button to display
OIL LIFE, then press and hold the RESET button until
100% OIL LIFE is displayed. This only needs to be reset
after you have had the oil changed. See Engine Oil
Life System on page 6-16 for more information.
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring oil
life, additional maintenance is recommended in the
Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 7-4 and Engine Oil on page 6-13
for more information.
ENG/METRIC (English/Metric): This feature allows
you to switch the DIC displays between English
and Metric. Press the RESET button to switch the
display between English and Metric. There will be an
arrow next to the option that is selected.
REAR Lxx Rxx PSI: This feature shows the tire
pressure for the rear left and right tires.
3-63
DIC Warnings and Messages
These messages will appear if there is a problem
sensed in one of your vehicle’s systems. You must then
press RESET to clear the display screen for further
use. However, be sure to take any message that
appears on the display screen seriously and remember
that pressing the RESET button will only make the
message disappear, not the problem.
DIC messages can also be displayed in English,
French, German, Italian and Spanish.
ABS ACTIVE: When your anti-lock system is adjusting
brake pressure to help avoid a braking skid, the ABS
ACTIVE message will be displayed.
Slippery road conditions may exist if this message is
displayed, so adjust your driving accordingly. The
message may stay on for a few seconds after the
system stops adjusting brake pressure.
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE: This message is displayed
when the vehicle has detected that the battery voltage
is dropping beyond a reasonable point. The battery
saver system will start reducing certain features of the
vehicle that you may not be able to notice. At the
point that features are disabled, this message is
displayed. It means that the vehicle is trying to save the
charge in the battery. Turn off unnecessary accessories
to allow the battery to recharge.
3-64
CHANGE OIL NOW: This means that the life of the
engine oil has expired. See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 7-4. After an oil change, the Oil Life Indicator
must be reset. See Oil Life Indicator on page 3-77 and
Engine Oil Life System on page 6-16.
CHARGE SYSTEM FAULT: This message will display
when a problem with the charging system has been
detected. Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer.
CHECK GAS CAP: This message will appear if the
gas cap has not been fully tightened. You should
recheck your gas cap to ensure that it is on properly.
CLEAN RADAR CRUISE: This message indicates the
ACC system is disabled because the radar is blocked and
cannot detect vehicles in your path. It may also activate
during heavy rain or due to road spray. To clean the
system, see “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” under Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
CLOSE CARGO DIVIDER: This message indicates that
the cargo divider is not in place. Open the trunk and
make sure the cargo divider is secure and no objects are
on the divider. See Rear Storage Area on page 2-44
for more information.
COOLANT OVER TEMP: This message will appear
when the engine coolant temperature is too hot.
Stop and allow your vehicle to idle in PARK (P) until it
cools down and the message is removed. Do not
increase engine speed above a normal idle. If it does
not cool down, turn off the engine and have it serviced
by your GM dealer before driving it again. Severe
engine damage can result from an overheated engine.
See Engine Overheating on page 6-23.
CRUISE NOT READY: This message indicates that
ACC will not activate due to a temporary condition. Your
vehicle does not require service. If this message
appears when you attempt to activate the system,
continue driving for several minutes then try again to
activate the system.
DRIVER NO. X (1 OR 2): This message will be
displayed when the vehicle is started or when there is a
change of driver. The message will show which driver
is activating the personalization feature. It will only
stay on for five seconds.
ENGINE PROTECTION REDUCE ENGINE RPM:
If this message appears, the control system has
determined that continued operation at the existing
engine speed may lead to engine overheating.
Therefore, you should lower the engine speed by
upshifting the transmission or drive at a lower speed.
HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED: If it is dark enough
outside and the headlamps and Twilight Sentinel®
controls are off, this message will display on the DIC.
This message informs the driver that turning on the
exterior lamps is recommended. It has become
dark enough outside to require the headlamps and/or
other exterior lamps. This message will also appear
if the optional Rainsense™ wiping feature is on and the
Twilight Sentinel® is off.
HIGH TRANS TEMP: This message indicates that the
transaxle fluid in your vehicle is too hot. Stop and
allow your vehicle to idle until it cools down or until this
message is removed.
ENGINE HOT, STOP ENGINE: This message will
appear when the engine has overheated. Stop and turn
the engine off immediately to avoid severe engine
damage. See Engine Overheating on page 6-23. A
multiple chime will also sound when this message
is displayed.
3-65
HIGH VOLTAGE: This message shows that the
electrical charging system is overcharging. To avoid
being stranded, have the electrical system checked by
your GM dealer. You can reduce the charging
overload by using the accessories. Turn on the lamps
and radio, set the climate control on AUTO and the
fan speed on HI, and turn the rear window defogger on.
You can monitor battery voltage on the DIC by
pressing the information button. The normal range is
11.5 to 15.5 volts when the engine is running.
LOW BRAKE FLUID: This message will display if the
vehicle is running to inform the driver that the brake
fluid level is low. Have the brake system serviced
by your GM dealer as soon as possible. See “Brake
Fluid” under Brakes on page 6-33.
HOT ENGINE–A/C OFF: This message displays when
the engine coolant becomes hotter than the normal
operating temperature. To avoid added strain on a hot
engine, the air conditioning compressor is automatically
turned off. When the coolant temperature returns to
normal, the A/C operation will automatically resume. You
can continue to drive your vehicle. If this message
continues to appear, have the system repaired by
your GM dealer as soon as possible to avoid
compressor damage.
LOW FUEL: This message will appear when the fuel
supply is less than 5 gallons (18.9 L) and the display is
turned off. A single chime will also sound when this
message is displayed.
ICE POSSIBLE: This message appears when the
outside air temperature is cold enough to create icy road
conditions.
LEFT DOOR AJAR: This message will display anytime
the vehicle engine is running, the transmission is not
in PARK (P) and the driver’s door is open or ajar.
A chime will sound when the vehicle’s speed is greater
than 3 mph (4.8 km/h).
3-66
LOW COOLANT: This message will appear when there
is a low level of engine coolant. Have the cooling
system serviced by your GM dealer as soon as possible.
See Engine Coolant on page 6-20.
LOW OIL LEVEL: For correct operation of the low oil
sensing system, your vehicle should be on a level
surface. A false LOW OIL LEVEL message may appear if
the vehicle is parked on a grade. The oil level sensing
system does not check for actual oil level if the engine
has been off for a short period of time, and the oil level is
never checked while the engine is running. If the LOW
OIL LEVEL message appears, and your vehicle has been
parked on level ground with the engine off for at least
30 minutes, the oil level should be checked by observing
the oil dipstick. Prior to checking the oil level, be sure the
engine has been off for a few minutes and your vehicle is
on a level surface. Then check the dipstick and add oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 6-13.
LOW OIL PRESSURE: If this message appears while
the engine is running, stop the engine and do not
operate it until the cause of low oil pressure is corrected.
Severe damage to the engine can result. A multiple
chime will sound when this message is displayed.
LOW VOLTAGE: This message will appear when the
electrical system is charging less than 10 volts or if
the battery has been drained. If this message appears
immediately after starting, it is possible that the
generator can still recharge the battery. The battery
should recharge while driving but may take a few hours
to do so. Consider using an auxiliary charger (be
sure to follow the manufacturer’s instructions) to boost
the battery after returning home or to a final destination.
If this message appears while driving or after starting
your vehicle and stays on, have it checked immediately
by your GM dealer to determine the cause of this
problem. To help the generator recharge the battery
quickly, you can reduce the load on the electrical system
by turning off the accessories. You can monitor battery
voltage on the DIC by pressing the INFO button.
The normal range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.
LOW WASHER FLUID: This message means that your
vehicle is low on windshield washer fluid. See
Windshield Washer Fluid on page 6-32.
MAX SPEED XX MPH (XX KM/H): A failure in the
magnetic ride control system has occurred when this
message appears. The Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) determines the speed to which your vehicle is
limited. Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer if
this message appears.
NO FOB DETECTED: This message is displayed if the
vehicle does not detect the presence of a keyless
access transmitter when you have attempted to start the
vehicle or a vehicle door has just closed. The following
conditions may cause this message to appear:
• Driver-added equipment, such as two-way radios or
power inverters, is causing interference. Try moving
the keyless access transmitter away from these
devices when starting the vehicle.
• The vehicle is experiencing Electro-Magnetic
Interference (EMI). Some locations, such as airports
or some gas stations, have EMI fields which may
interfere with your keyless access transmitter. If
moving the transmitter to different locations within the
vehicle does not help, place the transmitter in the
glove box transmitter pocket with the buttons facing
to the right and then press the START button.
3-67
NO FOB, OFF OR RUN?: This message is displayed
when you turn off the engine, but the vehicle does
not detect a keyless access transmitter in the vehicle.
The vehicle will remain in accessory mode until the
engine has been turned off or started, or five minutes
has expired. If you select OFF, the vehicle cannot
be started again without a remote access transmitter in
the vehicle.
OVER SPEED WARNING: This message is displayed
when the vehicle speed exceeds a certain limit as
required by some export countries. A chime will sound
when this message is displayed.
PRESS BRAKE TO START: The brake pedal must be
applied to start the vehicle. Make sure you are
pressing the brake pedal all the way down.
REDUCED ENGINE POWER: This message informs
you that the vehicle is reducing engine power because
the transmission is being placed in gear under
conditions that may cause damage to the vehicle’s
engine, transmission or ability to accelerate.
RIGHT DOOR AJAR: The passenger’s door is open or
ajar when this message appears. The vehicle must
be running and the transmission not in PARK (P) for this
message to display. A chime will sound if the vehicle’s
speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).
3-68
SERVICE A/C: This message appears when the
electronic sensors that control the air conditioning and
heating systems are no longer working. Have the climate
control system serviced by your GM dealer if you
notice a drop in heating and air conditioning efficiency.
SERVICE ABS: If the SERVICE ABS message is
displayed when you are driving, stop as soon as
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the message stays on,
or comes back on again while you are driving,
your vehicle is in need of service. See your GM dealer.
If the SERVICE ABS message is being displayed, your
Traction Control System and StabiliTrak® System will
also be disabled. The Driver Information Center will scroll
three messages: SERVICE ABS, SERVICE TRACTION
SYS and SERVICE STABILITRAK, and the anti-lock
brake system and traction control warning lights on the
instrument panel cluster will be illuminated. See Anti-Lock
Brake System Warning Light on page 3-53 and Traction
Control System (TCS) Warning Light on page 3-53. The
driver can acknowledge these messages by pressing the
RESET button three times. When the service message is
displayed the computer controlled systems will not assist
the driver and you should have the system repaired by
your GM dealer as soon as possible. Adjust your driving
accordingly.
SERVICE ELECT SYSTEM: This message will display
if an electrical problem has occurred within the
Powertrain Control Module (PCM). Have your vehicle
serviced by your GM dealer.
SERVICE FUEL SYSTEM: The Powertrain Control
Module (PCM) has detected a problem within the fuel
system when this message appears. Have your
vehicle serviced by your GM dealer. This message will
also be displayed when the cluster is not getting
fuel information from the PCM.
SERVICE RADAR CRUISE: This message indicates
that the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system is
disabled and needs service. See your GM dealer.
SERVICE RIDE CONTROL: This message indicates
there is a problem with the Magnetic Ride Control
System. Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer.
SERVICE TRACTION SYS: This message
indicates there is a problem with the Traction Control
System (TCS). Have your vehicle serviced by your
GM dealer.
SERVICE STABILITRAK: If this message appears it
means there may be a problem with your stability
enhancement system. If you see this message, try to
reset the system. Stop, turn off the engine, then start the
engine again. If the SERVICE STABILITRAK message
still comes on, it means there is a problem. You
should see your GM dealer for service. Reduce your
speed and drive accordingly. A single chime will
also sound when this message is displayed.
SERVICE TRANSMISSION: This message indicates
that there is a problem with the transmission. Have your
vehicle serviced by your GM dealer.
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON: This message is displayed
when a non-emissions related powertrain malfunction
occurs. Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer
as soon as possible.
SHIFT TO PARK: This message indicates that the
vehicle is not in PARK (P) when the engine is being
turned off. The vehicle will be in accessory mode. Once
the shifter is moved to PARK (P), the vehicle will turn off.
3-69
STABILITRAK ACTIVE: You may see the
STABILITRAK ACTIVE message on the Driver
Information Center. It means that an advanced,
computer-controlled system has come on to help your
vehicle continue to go in the direction in which you
are steering. This stability enhancement system
activates when the computer senses that your vehicle is
just starting to spin, as it might if you hit a patch of
ice or other slippery spot on the road. When the system
is on, you may hear a noise or feel a vibration in the
brake pedal. This is normal.
When the STABILITRAK ACTIVE message is on, you
should continue to steer in the direction you want to go.
The system is designed to help you in bad weather
or other difficult driving situations by making the
most of whatever road conditions will permit. If the
STABILITRAK ACTIVE message comes on, you will
know that something has caused your vehicle to start to
spin, so you should consider slowing down. A single
chime will also sound when this message is displayed.
STABILITRAK READY: If you receive this message
and hear a chime, the system has completed the
functional check of the StabiliTrak® System.
3-70
STABILITRAK WARMING: When you first start your
vehicle and drive away, especially during cold winter
weather, the STABILITRAK WARMING message may
be displayed in the DIC along with a chime and the
traction control warning light. This is normal. You can
acknowledge this message by pressing the RESET
button. The StabiliTrak® performance is affected until the
STABILITRAK READY message is displayed in the
DIC, which can take up to 15 minutes.
SVC TIRE MONITOR: If this message comes on, a
part on the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) is not working
properly. If you drive your vehicle while any of the
four sensors are missing or inoperable, the warning will
come on in approximately 10 minutes. If all four
sensors are missing, the warning will come on in
approximately 15 to 20 minutes. (All the sensors would
be missing, for example, if you put different wheels
on your vehicle without transferring the sensors.) If the
warning comes on and stays on, there may be a
problem with the TPM. See your GM dealer.
TOO COLD TO MOVE TOP: This message will display
when the retractable hardtop button is pressed and the
hardtop pump motor temperature is below −4°F (−20°C).
Wait for the hardtop pump motor to warm up before using
the retractable hardtop.
TOP INOP – VALET ON: This message will display
when the retractable hardtop button is pressed and the
valet switch is on. Turn off the valet switch before
using the retractable hardtop.
TRAC/STABILITRAK OFF: This message indicates
that both the Traction Control System (TCS) and
StabiliTrak® are off. The message will remain until the
systems are turned on again.
TOP INOP OUT OF PARK: This message will display if
the retractable hardtop button is pressed while the
vehicle is not in PARK (P).
TRAC/STABILITRAK ON: This message indicates that
both the Traction Control System (TCS) and the
StabiliTrak® are on.
TOP MOTOR OVER TEMP: This message will display
when the retractable hardtop button is pressed and
the hardtop pump motor temperature is over
221°F (105°C). Wait for the hardtop pump motor to cool
down before using the retractable hardtop.
TRACTION SYSTEM OFF: This message indicates
that the Traction Control System (TCS) is off but
StabiliTrak® remains on.
TOP NOT SECURE: This message will display when
the retractable hardtop button is released before the top
open or close operation is complete. Press and hold
the retractable hardtop button to fully open or close
the top.
TRAC SYSTEM ACTIVE: When your traction control
system is limiting wheel spin, the TRACTION SYSTEM
ACTIVE message will be displayed. Slippery road
conditions may exist if this message is displayed, so
adjust your driving accordingly. This message will stay
on for a few seconds after the traction control system
stops limited wheel spin.
TRACTION SYSTEM ON: This message indicates that
the Traction Control System (TCS) is on, but
StabiliTrak® is off.
TRUNK AJAR: This message indicates that the trunk is
open while the vehicle is running and not in PARK (P).
WAIT FOR STABILITRAK: This message will be
displayed after driving 19 mph (30 km/h) for 10 seconds
if the steering is not centered. StabiliTrak® is not
available until the steering centers itself and the
STABILITRAK READY message is displayed in the DIC.
3-71
Other Messages
• LEFT FRONT TIRE FLAT MAX SPD 55, REDUCED
HNDLG
Here are more messages that you can receive on your
Driver Information Center (DIC). To acknowledge a
message and read another message that may have
come on at the same time, press the RESET button.
• ACCESSORY MODE ON
• CHANGE OIL SOON
(See Engine Oil on page 6-13 and Engine Oil Life
System on page 6-16.)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
FOB BATTERY LOW
HIGH TIRE PRESS LF
HIGH TIRE PRESS RF
HIGH TIRE PRESS LR
HIGH TIRE PRESS RR
INTRUSION SENSOR OFF
INTRUSION SENSOR ON
KNOWN FOB
3-72
• LEFT REAR TIRE FLAT MAX SPD 55, REDUCED
HNDLG
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
LOW TIRE PRESS LF
LOW TIRE PRESS RF
LOW TIRE PRESS LR
LOW TIRE PRESS RR
MAX # FOBS LEARNED
OFF-ACC TO LEARN
READY FOR FOB #X
RIGHT FRT TIRE FLAT MAX SPD 55, REDUCED
HNDLG
• RIGHT REAR TIRE FLAT MAX SPD 55, REDUCED
HNDLG
• WAIT XX MINUTES
DIC Vehicle Personalization
Your vehicle is equipped with personalization capabilities
that allows you to program certain features to a
preferred setting for up to two drivers. The back of the
keyless access transmitters are labelled 1 or 2.
The current driver’s preferences are recalled when one
of the following occurs:
• The lock or unlock button on the keyless access
transmitter, programmed as 1 or 2, is pressed.
• The appropriate memory button, 1 or 2, located on
the driver’s seat is pressed. See Memory Seat,
Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 2-54 for more
information.
• A valid keyless access transmitter is detected upon
opening the driver’s door.
If more than one valid keyless access transmitter is
detected upon opening the driver’s door, the driver
preferences for the lowest driver number will be recalled.
Also, if the OPTIONS button is pressed, the DIC does not
display the menus used to set personalizations, but
instead displays OPTIONS UNAVAILABLE for a few
seconds.
Feature Programming
To change feature preferences, make sure the vehicle
is running and in PARK (P). Press the OPTIONS
button and the Driver Information Center (DIC) will
display the current driver for a few seconds, then display
the first personalization menu item. You can now use
the OPTIONS button to change the setting of the
displayed feature. Press the top or bottom of the
information button to scroll up or down the list of
features. When you get to a feature you want to change,
press the OPTIONS button again. When you are
finished, press the RESET button to exit the
personalization menu. If no button is pressed within
45 seconds, the DIC will exit the personalization menu.
The following are DIC options that will be available
in the personalization menu.
If a keyless access transmitter is programmed
as #3 or #4, the personalization system will not recognize
the transmitter. The Driver Information Center (DIC) will
not display a current driver number and the features that
are normally programmed through the DIC will be set to
the default states.
3-73
Auto Recall
Approach Lights
This feature allows the steering column, outside mirrors
and the driver’s seat to automatically move to the current
driver’s set position when the engine starts. The DIC will
display AUTO RECALL OFF or AUTO RECALL ON.
Press the OPTIONS button to change the setting.
This feature activates the parking lamps, front fog lamps
and back-up lamps during low light periods when the
unlock button on the keyless access transmitter is
pressed, both doors are closed and the vehicle is off or
in RAP. The lamps remain on for 20 seconds or until
a door is opened, the lock button on the keyless access
transmitter is pressed or the vehicle is no longer off
or in RAP.
Auto Exit Recall
This feature allows the steering column and driver’s
seat to automatically move to the current driver’s
exit position when one of the following occurs:
• The vehicle is turned off or in RAP or accessory
mode and the driver’s door is opened.
• The vehicle is turned off or in RAP and the unlock
button on the keyless access transmitter is
pressed.
The DIC will display AUTO EXIT RECALL OFF or
AUTO EXIT RECALL ON. Press the OPTIONS button
to change the setting.
The DIC will display APPROACH LIGHTS OFF or
APPROACH LIGHTS ON. Press the OPTIONS button
to change the setting.
Exit Lights
This feature activates the parking lamps and front fog
lamps for 15, 30 or 90 seconds. This will occur when the
vehicle is off or in RAP and the headlamps are on
due to the automatic headlamp system. The parking
lamps and front fog lamps will remain on until the driver
selected time period expires, the exterior lamp control
is activated or the vehicle is no longer off or in RAP.
The DIC will display EXIT LIGHTS OFF, EXIT
LIGHTS - 15 SEC, EXIT LIGHTS - 30 SEC or EXIT
LIGHTS - 90 SEC. Press the OPTIONS button to
change the setting.
3-74
Flash at Unlock
FOB Reminder
This feature activates the front and rear turn signals for
two short flashes when the unlock or trunk button on
the keyless access transmitter is pressed or when
OnStar® unlocks the doors. This will only occur when
the vehicle is off.
This feature sounds the horn three times when the
driver door is closed and there is a keyless access
transmitter inside the interior of the vehicle. This will only
occur when the vehicle is off.
The DIC will display NO FLASH AT UNLOCK or FLASH
AT UNLOCK. Press the OPTIONS button to change
the setting.
Flash at Lock
This feature activates the front and rear turn signals for
one long flash when the lock button on the keyless
access transmitter is pressed or when OnStar® locks the
doors. This will only occur when the vehicle is off. If the
lock button is pressed again within five seconds, the horn
will sound regardless of which setting you have selected.
The DIC will display NO FLASH AT LOCK or FLASH
AT LOCK. Press the OPTIONS button to change
the setting.
The DIC will display FOB REMINDER OFF or FOB
REMINDER HORN. Press the OPTIONS button
to change the setting.
Passive Locking
This feature allows you to select whether the doors
automatically lock when the ignition is turned off,
the keyless access transmitter has been removed from
the interior of the vehicle, and the doors have been
closed for eight seconds. If a keyless access transmitter
is left inside of the vehicle, the doors will not lock.
You may temporarily disable the passive door locking
feature by pressing a door unlock switch for three
seconds while a door is open. Passive door locking will
then remain disabled until a door lock switch is pressed or
until the power mode transitions from the off power mode.
3-75
You can select to not have the horn sound when the
passive lock occurs. If you choose this setting, the doors
will automatically lock eight seconds after you turn the
ignition off, remove the keyless access transmitter
from the interior of the vehicle and close both doors.
You can also select to have the horn sound once when
the passive lock occurs. If you choose this setting,
the doors will automatically lock and the horn will chirp
eight seconds after you turn the ignition off, remove
the keyless access transmitter from the interior of the
vehicle and close both doors.
If you are parking in a quiet area and do not want the
horn to sound when the doors lock, press the lock button
on the keyless access transmitter immediately after
removing it from the interior and closing the doors. This
will lock the doors and cancel the passive locking for
this ignition cycle.
The DIC will display PASSIVE LOCKING OFF, SILENT
PASSIVE LOCK or HORN AT PASSIVE LOCK.
Press the OPTIONS button to change the setting.
3-76
Passive Unlocking
This feature allows you to select which doors will
automatically unlock when you approach and open the
driver’s door with your keyless access transmitter.
You can choose to have the driver’s door unlock or both
doors unlock. See Door Locks on page 2-9 for more
information.
The DIC will display PASSIVE UNLK DRIVER or
PASSIVE UNLK BOTH. Press the OPTIONS button to
change this setting.
Auto Unlock
This feature automatically unlocks either the driver’s
door or both doors, depending on the setting, when the
shift lever is moved to PARK (P).
The DIC will display AUTO UNLOCK OFF, AUTO
UNLOCK DRIVER or AUTO UNLOCK BOTH. Press the
OPTIONS button to change the setting.
Park Assist
This feature tilts the passenger’s side mirror downward
when the shifter is moved to REVERSE (R). This
can help you to see the curb while backing up. If you
adjust the mirror while in REVERSE (R), the new
position will be saved as the park assist position.
The DIC will display PARK ASSIST OFF or PARK
ASSIST ON.
Language
This feature allows you to select the language the DIC
and Head-Up Display (HUD), uses to display
messages.
The DIC will display ENGLISH, FRENCH, GERMAN,
ITALIAN, JAPANESE or SPANISH. Press the OPTIONS
button to change the setting.
If you become stuck in a language that you do not
understand, hold the OPTIONS and RESET button for
five seconds. The DIC will scroll through all available
languages for as long as the buttons are held.
Each language option will display in its own language.
For example, English will be displayed as ENGLISH,
Spanish as ESPANOL, etc. When the desired language
is available, release the buttons and the DIC will set
to this language.
Trip Computer
Oil Life Indicator
This feature lets you know when to change the engine
oil. It is based on the engine oil temperatures and
your driving patterns.
To see the display, press the information button several
times until OIL LIFE appears. If you see 99% OIL
LIFE, 99 percent of your current oil life remains.
The DIC may display a CHANGE OIL NOW message. If
you see CHANGE OIL NOW, it means the oil life is
gone. For more information, see Scheduled
Maintenance on page 7-4 and Engine Oil on page 6-13.
When the oil is changed, you will need to reset the
system. See Engine Oil Life System on page 6-16.
Always keep a written record of the mileage and date
when you changed your oil.
3-77
Audio System(s)
Theft-Deterrent Feature
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone, or two-way radio, make sure that it can
be added by checking with your dealer. Also,
check federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone units. If sound equipment can be added,
it is very important to do it properly. Added
sound equipment may interfere with the operation
of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems,
and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may
interfere with the operation of sound equipment
that has been added improperly.
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). If the radio is moved to a different
vehicle, it will not operate. If the radio is removed from
your vehicle, the original VIN in the radio can be
used to trace the radio back to your vehicle.
Figure out which audio system is in your vehicle, find
out what your audio system can do, and how to operate
all of its controls.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be
played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-22 for more
information.
3-78
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not operate
if stolen.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
+ SEEK: Press this button to go to the next radio
station and stay there. The radio will only seek stations
with a strong signal that are in the selected band.
When a CD is playing, press this button to go to the
next track. If this button is pressed more than once, the
player will continue moving forward through the CD.
> (Mute):
Press this button to silence the system.
Press this button again, or any other radio button, to turn
the sound on.
+ u− (Volume): Press this button to increase or to
decrease the volume.
Some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering
wheel. They include the following:
g (Voice Recognition):
See “OnStar® Steering
Wheel Controls” under OnStar® System on page 2-36
or OnStar® System on page 4-42 for more information.
+ 1–6 − (Preset Stations): Press this button to play
stations that are programmed on the radio preset
pushbuttons. The radio will only seek preset stations
with a strong signal that are in the selected band.
When a CD is playing, press this button to go to the
next track.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped), CD,
or DVD.
3-79
Radio Reception
Cellular Phone Usage
AM
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with your
vehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when
making or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s
battery, or simply having the phone on. This interference
is an increased level of static while listening to the
radio. If static is received while listening to the radio,
unplug the cellular phone and turn it off.
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with each other. Static
can occur on AM stations caused by things like
storms and power lines. Try reducing the treble to
reduce this noise.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals will
reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to fade in and out.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast to coast. Just as with FM, tall
buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals,
causing the sound to fade in and out. The radio may
display NO XM SIGNAL to indicate interference.
Care of Your CDs
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct
sunlight and dust. If the surface of a CD is soiled,
dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent
solution and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
handling CDs. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges
or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Care of Your CD Player
The use of CD lens cleaners for CD players is not
advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the
CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
3-80
Diversity Antenna System
The AM-FM antennas are located under the decklid
surface in the trunk compartment. the antennas
are hidden from view and are not accessible.
If adding an aftermarket cellular telephone to your
vehicle, do not attach the antenna to the rear glass. This
would interfere with the convertible top retraction
operation and could cause damage to the
finished/painted surfaces.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the
trunk of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow
and ice build up for clear radio reception.
3-81
✍ NOTES
3-82
Section 4
Navigation System
Overview .........................................................4-2
Navigation System Overview ............................4-2
Getting Started ...............................................4-4
Features and Controls ......................................4-4
Using the Navigation System ...........................4-4
Setup Menu ...................................................4-7
Plan Route ..................................................4-13
Edit Memory Point ........................................4-13
Edit Waypoint ...............................................4-17
Edit Avoid Point/Area ....................................4-20
Enter Destination ..........................................4-21
Route Preference ..........................................4-31
Maps ..........................................................4-33
Symbols ......................................................4-36
Remote Keyless Entry System ........................4-42
OnStar® System ...........................................4-42
Global Positioning System (GPS) ....................4-42
Vehicle Positioning ........................................4-43
Problems with Route Guidance .......................4-44
If the System Needs Service ..........................4-45
Ordering Map DVDs ......................................4-45
Database Coverage Explanations ....................4-45
Navigation Audio System ................................4-45
Six-Disc CD Changer ....................................4-61
CD/DVD Player ............................................4-63
Radio Personalization with Home and
Away Feature ...........................................4-69
Voice Recognition ..........................................4-69
4-1
Overview
Navigation System Overview
4-2
A. BAND Key. See “Finding a Station” under Navigation
Audio System on page 4-45.
B. CD Key. See Navigation Audio System on page 4-45
or CD/DVD Player on page 4-63.
C. DVD Key. See “Playing a DVD” under CD/DVD
Player on page 4-63.
D. TUNE/SEEK Key. See “Playing the Radio” under
Navigation Audio System on page 4-45.
E. Audio/Adjust Key. See “Main Audio Menu” under
Navigation Audio System on page 4-45.
F. Power-Volume Knob. See “Hard Keys” under Using
the Navigation System on page 4-4.
G. Navigation System Screen
H. RPT (Repeat) Key. See “Hard Keys” under Using
the Navigation System on page 4-4.
I. MAP Key. See “Hard Keys” under Using the
Navigation System on page 4-4.
J. ROUTE Key. See “Hard Keys” under Using the
Navigation System on page 4-4.
K. MENU Key. See “Hard Keys” under Using the
Navigation System on page 4-4.
L. TILT Key. See “Hard Keys” under Using the
Navigation System on page 4-4.
4-3
Getting Started
Before you begin to operate the navigation system, read
this manual thoroughly to become familiar with it and
to understand how the system works.
The navigation system allows you to do the following:
• Plan a route with provided turn-by-turn route
and map guidance with voice prompts. See
Plan Route on page 4-13 for more information.
• Select a destination using various methods and
choices.
When getting started, you may set the navigation
system to your preference using various options. To do
so, reference the following topics:
• To adjust screen appearance, language, clock,
English/metric measurements, or other options, see
“Main Audio Menu” under Navigation Audio
System on page 4-45.
• To adjust voice guidance volume or other navigation
settings, see Setup Menu on page 4-7.
Features and Controls
• Receive broadcast announcements on traffic and
emergency alert communications.
The information in the system may not always be
complete. Road conditions such as prohibited turns,
detours, and construction zones, change frequently. It is
important to consider whether you can follow the
directions given by the system for the current conditions.
Using the Navigation System
This section presents basic information you will need to
know to operate the navigation system.
Use the keys located on each side of the navigation
screen, as well as the available touch-sensitive screen
buttons, to operate the system. See Navigation System
Overview on page 4-2 for more information on location.
Once the vehicle is moving, various functions will be
disabled to reduce driver distraction.
4-4
Hard Keys
The following hard keys are located to the left of the
navigation screen:
BAND: Press the BAND key to access the band screen
and switch between AM, FM1, FM2, XM1, XM2, and
WX, if equipped. See “Finding a Station” under
Navigation Audio System on page 4-45.
CD: Press the CD key to play a CD. The CD screen
will be displayed. See Six-Disc CD Changer on
page 4-61 or CD/DVD Player on page 4-63.
DVD: Press the DVD key to play a DVD. The DVD
screen will be displayed. See CD/DVD Player on
page 4-63.
y TUNE/SEEK z:
Press the TUNE/SEEK up or
down arrows to go to the next or previous radio station
and stay there. See “Finding a Station” under
Navigation Audio System on page 4-45.
e/ z:
Press the audio/adjust key to view the main
audio menu. See “Main Audio Menu” under Navigation
Audio System on page 4-45.
PWR-VOL (Power/Volume Knob): Press the
power/volume knob to turn the audio and navigation
systems on and off. Turn the knob to increase or
decrease the volume to the audio system.
The following hard keys are located to the right of the
navigation screen:
RPT: Press the repeat key to repeat the current voice
guidance navigation prompt.
MAP: Press the MAP key to view the map screen
showing current vehicle position.
The map screen can also display the following
information:
• North or Heading Up symbol. See Symbols on
page 4-36.
• Map scale. See Maps on page 4-33.
• Distance to destination.
• GPS symbol if GPS signal is not being received. See
Global Positioning System (GPS) on page 4-42.
• Options you have selected for reaching your current
destination.
• Driver Information.
• Radio band and presets.
4-5
ROUTE: Press the ROUTE key to display the PLAN
ROUTE menu. See Plan Route on page 4-13.
V:
MENU: Press the MENU key to display the SETUP
MENU. See Setup Menu on page 4-7.
To make your name selections easier, the system will
only allow you to select a character which can follow the
last one entered. For example, if you enter Z, you
would not be allowed to follow it with T. The system will
highlight the available characters and darken the
unavailable characters.
TILTX: Press the TILT key to open the navigation
system faceplate for loading or removing the map DVD,
a video DVD, or an audio CD. This key can only be
used while the vehicle is in PARK (P).
Alpha-Numeric Keypad
Letters of the alphabet, symbols, punctuation, and
numbers, when available to you, will be displayed on
the navigation screen as an alpha or numeric keypad.
The alpha keypad will be displayed when the system
needs you to input a city or street name. You can also
touch Char at the bottom of the alpha keypad to
access the numeric keypad when inputting a house
address, punctuation mark, or other character. Touch
A - Z to return to the alpha keypad.
All characters are touch-sensitive screen buttons. Touch
a character to select it.
Select the space symbol to enter a space between
characters or the words of a name.
4-6
Select the backspace symbol if you have selected
an incorrect character.
If you are unsuccessful when inputting a name, it may
need to be selected differently. It is also possible that the
map DVD database may not contain that information
or the correct search area has not been selected. See
Database Coverage Explanations on page 4-45 for
more information.
Touch Sensitive Buttons
Touch-sensitive buttons, or screen buttons, are located
on the screen. When you have successfully selected
a screen button, a beep will be heard. These buttons will
be highlighted when a feature is available and dim
when they are unavailable. There are some toggle
screen buttons that will be light blue when active and
dark blue when inactive.
Setup Menu
Navigation Settings
MENU: Press the MENU key located to the right of the
navigation screen to access the SETUP MENU.
This menu allows you to change the following options
for the navigation system.
The SETUP MENU allows you to adjust such things as
map appearance, navigation settings, and voice
guidance volume.
Restore Default Settings
This feature will automatically reset the system to the
default values.
To restore the default settings, do the following:
1. Touch the Restore Default Settings screen button.
2. Touch Enter.
3. Touch Return to exit this menu.
4-7
System Configuration
This feature allows you to reconfigure the navigation
system. If you begin to drive your vehicle during
this procedure, the system will not be able to adjust the
position or direction of your vehicle.
Touch the System Configuration screen button to view
the following choices:
Adjust Vehicle Position: To correct the position of
your vehicle on the map or to change vehicle position,
do the following:
1. Touch the Adjust Vehicle Position screen button.
The system will display Position Adjustment. The
vehicle location symbol and the scroll symbol
will appear on the map.
2. Use the scroll symbol and the zoom in/zoom out
feature to locate the vehicle position on the map.
3. Touch Enter to set the vehicle position. The system
will display Position Adjustment and two arrows will
appear on the map screen.
4. Touch the arrows to adjust the direction of the
vehicle. As you touch the arrows, you will see
the vehicle symbol direction changing.
4-8
5. When you have set the vehicle to the correct
direction, touch Enter. Relocation Complete
will be displayed.
6. Touch Return to exit this menu.
Calibrate Vehicle Speed Signal: If there are tire
pressure differences or if a spare tire is installed, the
navigation system will automatically recalibrate the
system. You may also choose to calibrate it yourself by
doing the following:
1. Touch Start to begin calibration.
2. Touch Return to exit this menu.
Time to Destination
This feature allows you to view the estimated time to
travel from your current position to the destination, and
to reset the average speed to factory default settings.
Estimated travel time is based on calculated route
information and the vehicle’s average speed. Touch ON
to turn this feature on, OFF to turn this feature off, or
Reset to restore vehicle speed default settings. With this
feature on, the estimated travel time to destination will
display along with the distance to destination.
Quick POI (Point of Interest) Selection
Setting the Quick POI menu
This menu allows you to choose a point of interest
(POI), such as gas stations, restaurants, hotels, etc. to
be displayed on the map screen. You can also set a
destination to a specific POI.
To set the Quick POI list displayed on the map screen,
do the following:
1. Select the category you would like to replace.
2. Select a Quick POI category from the Quick POI
selection menu list. The system will return to the
Quick POI selection screen when a POI is selected.
3. Touch Return to save the setting and return
to previous menu.
Displaying Quick POI Icons
To display POI icons of a category on the map screen,
do the following:
1. Touch the map screen once.
2. Touch the POI button. The Quick POI Selection list
will be displayed.
3. Select a category type or touch List Categories Or
All Local POIs to display the icons of the selected
category on the map screen.
4-9
Removing Quick POI Icons
To remove POI icons from the map screen, do the
following:
1. Touch the map screen once.
2. Touch the POI OFF screen button. The current POI
icons will be removed from the map screen.
Setting a Destination Using Quick POI
This feature will allow you to choose a POI as your
destination. To set a destination using a POI, do
the following:
1. Touch the POI icon on the map screen that you
wish to set as a destination.
The selected icon will be surrounded by a blinking
box, and the name of the icon will be displayed.
You may also touch INFO to view the POI name,
address, city, and phone number, if available.
4-10
2. Touch the ENT DEST screen button.
If a final destination has already been entered, you
can add the POI as a waypoint. See Edit Waypoint
on page 4-17 for more information.
3. Touch Enter to start planning your route.
4. To start route guidance, touch Start or begin driving
the vehicle. Route guidance will automatically begin
after a short distance.
If you wish to cancel the route you have just set, do the
following:
1. Press the ROUTE hard key.
2. Touch the Route Preference screen button.
3. Touch the Cancel Route screen button.
4. Select YES to cancel or NO to continue.
Guidance Appearance
This menu allows you to set the guidance appearance
screen options. This screen is displayed on the map
while on a planned route. The current settings will
appear as light blue.
Turn List: Select this feature to have the guidance
screen display several upcoming turns. Directional
arrows, street name, and distance to the next turn will
be displayed. As you approach the next turn, the system
will display a closer view of the upcoming maneuver.
Arrow: Select this feature to have the guidance screen
display the next turn. A directional arrow, street
name, and distance to the turn will be displayed. As you
approach the turn, the system will display a closer
view of the upcoming maneuver.
2D: Select this feature to display the guidance screen
as a two-dimensional view.
3D: Select this feature to display the guidance screen
as a three-dimensional view.
Split Map: Select this feature to display the guidance
screen on the map at all times.
Full Screen: Select this feature to display the guidance
screen on the map when approaching a maneuver.
4-11
Map Appearance
This menu allows you to set the map appearance
screen options. The current setting will appear as
light blue.
Set 3D Viewing Angle: This feature allows you to
adjust the 3D viewing angle. To do so, do the following:
1. Touch 3D on the MAP APPEARANCE menu.
2. Touch Set 3D Viewing Angle.
The map screen with the 3D viewing angle bar
will be displayed.
3. Touch the up or down arrows to set the
viewing angle.
4. Touch Return to save your settings and to exit this
menu or touch Reset to restore the viewing angle to
the default setting.
Voice Guidance Volume Settings
This feature allows you to set the voice prompt volume
level or to turn voice prompts on or off.
2D: Select this feature to display the map as a
two-dimensional view.
3D: Select this feature to display the map as a
three-dimensional view.
Set the voice prompt volume level by touching the
numbered buttons to increase or decrease the volume
level. You may also choose to turn the voice prompts off.
Then touch Return to save your setting and to return
to the SETUP MENU.
If a voice prompt is active while the audio system is on,
the audio system volume will decrease and the voice
prompt will be heard through the driver’s side front
speaker.
Voice prompts will not be heard while using voice
recognition.
4-12
Plan Route
Edit Memory Point
To plan a route, press the ROUTE key. The PLAN
ROUTE menu will be displayed.
This feature allows you to store, delete, and edit
memory points. Touch the Edit Memory Point screen
button from the PLAN ROUTE menu to access the EDIT
MEMORY POINT screen.
You may use one of several destination entry methods
to plan a route. See Enter Destination on page 4-21
for more information.
You can store memory points in four different categories,
personal, business, entertainment, and marked point.
Memory points are stored when you select either START
or MARK when setting a destination on the map or
when you are storing destinations in memory.
4-13
A total of 60 locations can be stored. The last
10 destinations entered will be stored under Previous
Destination. In addition, one memory point can be stored
under the Home category.
Editing Memory Points
If all 60 stored points are entered, the system will notify
you that there is no available storage left in memory
points. A memory point must be removed before storing
additional memory points.
Icon Editing of a Memory Point
Registering Memory Points
To store a memory point, do the following:
1. Select a category from the EDIT MEMORY
POINT menu.
2. Touch REGISTER.
3. Select a method for entering a destination. A map
will appear displaying the memory point’s location.
4. If available, touch INFO to view the address
information for the memory point.
5. Touch Enter to store the point.
4-14
This feature allows you to edit the contents stored in
memory. The following options are available:
Each memory point is displayed with a default icon. To
edit an icon, do the following:
1. Select the category of the memory point.
2. Select the item you want to edit.
3. Touch the icon. The EDIT MEMORY POINT icon
screen will appear.
4. Touch the icon you would like to use. The system will
then return to the EDIT MEMORY POINT menu.
5. Touch Return to go back to the previous screen.
You will see the new memory point icon on the map.
When selecting an icon, you can choose from 18 different
icons, three of which are sound icons. The same icon
may be used for other memory points as well.
Name Editing of a Memory Point
Adjusting a Memory Point
To modify the name of a stored memory point, do the
following:
To relocate a memory point’s location, do the following:
1. Select the category of the memory point.
1. Select the category of the memory point.
2. Select the memory point you want to edit.
2. Select the item you want to edit.
3. Touch POSITION. A map screen with the position
of this memory point will appear.
3. Touch the NAME screen button and use the alpha
keypad to edit the name. Names may contain up to
15 alpha and/or numeric characters.
4. Touch Return to go to the previous screen.
4. Touch anywhere on the screen to activate the scroll
feature and relocate the memory point. See Maps
on page 4-33.
Moving Memory Points
5. Touch Enter to save the memory point’s new
location.
To move a memory point from one category to another,
do the following:
6. Touch Return to go back to the previous screen.
1. Select the category of the memory point.
2. Select the memory point you want to edit.
3. Touch CATEGORY. A list of categories will appear.
The current category for the item will be highlighted
and cannot be selected.
4. Touch the screen button for the category you want
the memory point placed in. A pop-up window will
appear displaying the change in category.
5. Touch Return to go back to the previous screen.
Changing the Phone Number of a
Memory Point
To edit or add the phone number of a memory point, do
the following:
1. Select the category of the memory point.
2. Select the memory point you want to edit.
3. Touch PHONE and use the numeric keypad to edit
or add the number.
4. Touch the RETURN button to take you back to the
previous screen when you have finished.
4-15
Deleting Single Memory Points
Edit Category
To delete a single memory point, do the following:
To edit the name of a category, do the following:
1. Press the ROUTE key.
1. Press the ROUTE key.
2. Touch EDIT MEMORY POINT.
2. Touch EDIT MEMORY POINT.
3. Select the category of the memory point.
4. Touch DELETE.
5. Select the memory point you want to delete. A
confirmation window will appear.
6. Touch YES to delete the memory point or NO to
return to the previous menu.
7. Touch Return to go back to the previous screen.
3. Select the category you want to edit.
Deleting All Memory Points
To delete all of the memory points in a category, do the
following:
1. Press the ROUTE key.
2. Touch EDIT MEMORY POINT.
3. Select the desired category.
4. Touch the DELETE ALL screen button. A
confirmation window will appear.
5. Touch YES to delete the memory points or NO to
return to the previous menu.
6. Touch Return to go back to the previous screen.
4-16
4. Touch the EDIT CATEGORY screen button and
use the alpha keypad to edit the category name.
The name can consist of up to 15 alpha and/or
numeric characters.
5. Touch Return to go back to the previous screen.
Marked Point
A marked point is a memory point which has been
stored by selecting the MARK screen button while
traveling on a planned route. You can also use the scroll
feature to plan a destination on the map after reaching
the destination, or by moving a memory point to a
marked point category. See “Editing Memory Points”
earlier in this section for more information.
Previous Destination Memory
Edit Waypoint
Each time you select Start from the map screen, that
destination will be stored as a memory point under
PREVIOUS DESTINATION. This category will store up
to 10 destinations.
Waypoints are destinations you can set along the way
to your final destination. This feature allows you to
add, edit, and delete waypoints.
When the Previous Destination category contains more
than 10 destinations, the system will remove the
oldest destination stored and add the most recent one
selected to the list.
If you do not want a previous destination to be lost,
you must move the destination into a memory
point category. See “Moving Memory Points” earlier
in this section for more information.
Home Memory
This memory point is stored by selecting Home from the
EDIT MEMORY POINT screen. See “Registering
Memory Points” earlier in this section and “Home” under
Enter Destination on page 4-21 for more information.
You may set up to five waypoints on the way to your
final destination.
To access the WAYPOINT menu, do the following:
1. Press the ROUTE key.
2. Touch Edit Waypoint.
4-17
Adding a Waypoint
To add a waypoint to your route, do the following:
1. Touch Add Waypoint.
2. Enter a destination. See Enter Destination on
page 4-21.
A map will appear showing the location of the
waypoint.
3. Touch Enter to add your waypoint.
4. Touch the ADD screen button to insert the waypoint
in the desired order.
5. The system will display the ROUTE INFORMATION
screen. From this screen, several options are
available.
4-18
List: Touch List to view the waypoint on the map or to
change the order of the waypoints and final destination.
To change the order, touch CHG ORDER, then
touch the blank screen button next to the destination to
select the order of the waypoints and final destination.
Press the MAP key to view the destination and
waypoints on the map screen.
Delete: Touch Delete to delete a waypoint or the final
destination. A confirmation window will appear.
Touch YES to delete the point or NO to return to the
previous screen.
Editing a Waypoint
Delete All: Touch Delete All to delete all of the
waypoints and the final destination. A confirmation
window will appear. Touch YES to delete all waypoints
or NO to return to the previous screen.
1. Touch Edit Waypoint.
Change: Touch Change to change the final destination.
Enter a destination. See Enter Destination on page 4-21.
Add: Touch Add to add additional waypoints. Refer to
the steps for adding a waypoint listed previously in
this section.
Calculate: Touch Calculate to begin route calculation.
This feature will only be available if the final destination
has been set.
This feature allows you to edit waypoints that have
already been set. To edit a waypoint, do the following:
2. Touch the MAP key to view the destination location
on the map screen.
3. Touch CHANGE ORDER to change the order of the
waypoints and the final destination.
You can also use the map scroll to change a
waypoint from one location to another.
Deleting a Waypoint
To delete a waypoint from your route, do the following:
1. Touch Delete Waypoint.
2. Select the waypoint you want to delete. A
confirmation window will appear.
3. Touch YES to delete the waypoint or NO to return
to the previous menu.
4-19
Edit Avoid Point/Area
Registering an Avoid Point/Area
From this menu you can register, edit, and delete an
area to be avoided while planning a route. These areas
can also be saved so the system can automatically
avoid them when planning a route.
To store an avoid point/area, do the following:
1. Touch Register Avoid Point/Area.
2. Enter a location. See Enter Destination on
page 4-21.
3. If desired, reduce or enlarge the area around the
point you want to avoid by using the REDUCE or
ENLARGE screen buttons.
If an avoid point cannot be avoided, the system will
display “Avoid Point and Area Stored. Route
May Not Avoid the Avoid Point and Areas.”
4. Touch Enter to set the area as an avoid point area.
When using the REDUCE or ENLARGE buttons, a
box will appear to represent the area or an X will
appear to represent the area avoided. When an
avoid point is set, the square will appear as green.
5. Touch Return to go back to the previous screen.
To access the AVOID POINT/AREA menu, do the
following:
1. Press the ROUTE key.
2. Touch Edit Avoid Point/Area.
4-20
Editing an Avoid Point/Area
Enter Destination
To edit an avoid point/area, do the following:
The DESTINATION menu will give you several ways to
plan a route. Touch the Enter Destination screen
button from the PLAN ROUTE menu to display the
DESTINATION menu.
1. Touch Edit Avoid Point/Area. A list of avoided
points will appear.
2. Select the avoided point/area you want to change.
A map of the avoided area will appear.
3. Use REDUCE or ENLARGE to edit the
avoided point.
4. Touch Enter to set your new avoided area. The
system will display “Area Adjusted.”
5. Touch Return to go back to the previous screen.
Deleting an Avoid Point/Area
To delete an avoid point/area, do the following:
1. Touch Delete Avoid Point/Area. A list of avoided
points will appear.
2. Select the avoided point/area you want to delete.
3. The system will ask you to confirm your selection.
Touch Yes to delete the avoid point/area or No
to cancel.
If Yes is selected, the area will no longer be
avoided when traveling on a planned route.
For destination entry methods listed on the second page
of the DESTINATION menu, touch the Next Page arrow.
Touch the Prev. Page arrow to return to the first page.
4. Touch Return to go back to the previous screen.
4-21
To enter a destination, choose from one of the
destination entry methods following in this section.
After entering a destination, If available, the system will
display up to three routes in a pop-up window
indicating the total mileage and time to destination for
each route. Select a route by touching NEXT. The map
will display each route in a different color. The selected
route will be highlighted in red.
Easy Planning Route
With this destination entry method, you can select a
destination using the scroll symbol on the map screen.
See Maps on page 4-33.
To start route guidance, touch Start or begin driving
your vehicle. Route guidance will automatically begin
after a short distance.
If you touch CHG ROUTE before touching Start, you will
be able to change route preferences. See Route
Preference on page 4-31 for more information.
When a route has been planned, it will be highlighted
and a bulls-eye symbol will appear on the map to show
your final destination.
If you wish to cancel a route that has been set, see
“Cancel Route” under Route Preference on page 4-31.
To use this destination entry method, do the following:
1. Press the MAP key.
2. Touch the map screen twice for the scroll symbol to
appear. Touch the map or drag the scroll symbol
toward your destination.
4-22
3. Touch the map screen continuously to scroll
through the map faster. The address of the location
on the map will appear at the top of the screen.
If needed, use the zoom feature to locate your
destination. See “Map Scales” under Maps
on page 4-33 for more information.
Address
This destination entry method allows you to input an
address by providing the system with a house number,
street name, and city. Select Street to begin entering
the desired address.
4. Touch ENT DEST to set this location as your
destination. You may also touch MARK to store this
location as a memory point.
5. Touch Enter to plan your route.
To use this destination entry method, do the following:
1. Enter the street name using the alpha keypad. See
“Alpha-Numeric Keypad” under Using the Navigation
System on page 4-4 for more information.
Do not include name extensions such as N. or Drive.
For example, the street name N. Civic Center Drive
should be entered as Civic Center. As information is
entered, the system will automatically search for
available names, and List will become available.
4-23
2. Touch List to view name choices or continue to
spell the street name to further reduce the number
of available items.
3. Once the street name has been selected, enter the
house number using the numeric keypad.
The system will list the house number range that is
available for the street.
4. When you have finished entering the house
number, touch Enter.
If the house number and street address you entered
exists in more than one city on the DVD database,
a list of cities will appear. You can select a city
from the list, or enter the city name by selecting City.
As you begin to enter the city name, you can
select the desired city from the list which will appear,
or continue to spell the city name to further reduce
the number of available items.
5. Touch Enter to plan your route.
4-24
All Points of Interest
This destination entry method allows you to choose a
destination from the point of interest (POI) list. Selecting
All Points Of Interest from the DESTINATION menu will
bring up the alpha keypad. While inputting a POI or city
name, the List option will become available. As
information is entered, the system will search for
available POI and city names based on the information
given. The system will supply a list of names to make a
selection from when the choices are five or less.
You may search for a POI using the following three
methods:
• Touch NAME to type in a POI by name using the
alpha key pad. As you type in a name, the system
will search for an available match to your input.
Select the desired POI.
• Select a POI by touching CATEGORY. Use the
arrows to scroll through the categories listed.
Select a category along with any appropriate
sub-categories. If the list of available POIs for the
selected category is too long, you may need to enter
the POI’s name or city.
• Select CITY, then type in the city you wish to select a
POI from. Choose a city from the list of cities that will
appear. If the list of POIs for the selected city is too
long, enter the POI’s name or choose a category.
While inputting a POI or city name, the List option will
become available. Touch List to view the list of
name choices, or continue to spell the name to further
reduce the list of available items.
Select a location from the list. The system will show the
selected POI on the map. If available, a pop-up
window will be displayed. Touch INFO to view the POI’s
name, address, city, and phone number, if available.
Touch Enter to plan your route.
The system will list all POIs available. You can sort by
name using NAME SORT or touch DIST SORT to
list POIs by distance from your current location.
4-25
Memory Points
This destination entry method allows you to set a
memory point as your destination. Each time you store
a destination from the map screen, the destination
is stored under MARKED POINT. See Edit Memory
Point on page 4-13 for more information.
To select a destination using this entry method, do the
following:
1. Touch the Memory Points symbol.
2. Select a category.
3. Select a destination. Use the arrows to scroll
through the memory points. They can be sorted by
date, name, distance, and icon.
4. Touch Enter to plan your route.
You must have destinations stored as memory points to
select from PERSONAL, BUSINESS,
ENTERTAINMENT, or MARKED POINT. If you have
renamed the memory point category name(s), the
name(s) will appear as you changed them.
4-26
Previous Destination
Previous Starting Point
This destination entry method allows you to select a
destination by choosing from a list of the last
10 destinations entered into the system.
This destination entry method allows you to select the
last start point as your destination. To select the
previous start point as your destination, do the following:
1. Touch Previous Destination.
2. Touch the Previous starting point screen button.
3. Touch Enter to plan your route.
To select a previous destination, do the following:
1. Touch the Previous Destination symbol.
2. Touch the screen button next to the desired
destination to select it.
Use the arrows if necessary to view the entire list of
previous destinations.
3. Touch Enter to plan your route.
4-27
Home
Set by Map
This destination entry method allows you to select a
destination that has been previously stored as Home.
This destination entry method allows you to select a
destination by using the scroll symbol.
To choose Home as your destination, do the following:
1. Touch the Home symbol.
2. Touch Enter to plan your route.
To use this feature, do the following:
1. Touch the Set By Map symbol. Current vehicle
position will be shown on the map screen.
2. Use the scroll symbol to select the desired
destination. The zoom in and zoom out feature can
be used to assist you in finding the desired location.
See “Map Scales” under Maps on page 4-33.
3. Touch Enter to plan your route.
4-28
Freeway Entrance/Exit
This destination entry method allows you to select either
a freeway entrance or an exit as a destination.
Freeways are also referred to by their abbreviated
names. For example, Interstate 75 in the U.S. is
selected by entering I-75.
As you enter a freeway name, the List option will
become available.
3. Touch List to view the list of available name choices
or continue to spell the name to further reduce the list
of available items. The system will supply a list of
names when the choice is five or less.
If you are unsuccessful when inputting a name, the
name may need to be input differently, the map
DVD database may not contain this information, or
the name may be misspelled.
4. Select a freeway from the list.
To enter a freeway name, do the following:
1. Touch the Freeway Entrance/Exit symbol.
2. Enter the freeway name using the alpha key pad.
Freeways sometimes have a name and a number
associated with them which you may need to refer to
when entering freeway information.
5. The ENTRANCE or EXIT options will appear.
Choose ENTRANCE to select the entrance to
the freeway, or EXIT to select the exit ramp of the
freeway.
When either button is touched, it will give an
alphabetical list of freeway entrance and exit ramps
on the freeway you entered. You may touch DIST
SORT to sort the list by distance from your current
location, or NAME SORT to sort the list by name.
6. Select the desired freeway entrance or exit from the
list. A map will appear with the destination shown.
7. Touch Enter to plan your route.
4-29
Intersection
This destination entry method allows you to select a
destination by inputting the intersecting roads you wish
to travel to.
3. To view a list of choices, touch List or continue to
spell the name to further reduce the list of available
items. The system will display a list of the
intersecting streets if the number of intersecting
streets is five or less.
4. Select the first street.
5. Now enter the second street name.
6. Select the second street name from the list of
intersecting streets. To view a list of choices,
touch List or continue to spell the name to further
reduce the list of available items. The system
will display a list of intersecting streets if the number
of intersecting streets is five or less.
If there are multiple intersections with the same two
roads, the system will display a list of cities to
choose from. Choose a city from this list. A map
with the intersections for that city will appear.
7. Touch Enter to plan your route.
To enter an intersection, do the following:
1. Touch the Intersection symbol.
2. Using the alpha keypad, enter the name of the first
street in the intersection.
4-30
Route Preference
Detour
To change your planning options, use the following
instructions.
This feature allows you to choose a distance in
miles/kilometers to detour. Select the detour distance
desired for residential roads and freeways.
1. Press the ROUTE key.
2. Touch Route Preference.
The following options will be available from the ROUTE
PREFERENCE menu:
The system will retain these settings for the next time
you use Detour, unless you change them.
You may also touch Alternate to provide a new route
that does not use previously stored detour settings.
Touch Return to go back to the previous screen.
4-31
Route Setting
This feature allows you to display and change the
planning methods used each time you plan a route. With
planning method options, you are able to select the
fastest route based on time or distance, using only major
roads, toll roads, and using ferries based on the
navigation system’s information and information
contained on the map DVD.
Use Major Roads: Choose Yes to calculate the best
route using only major roads unless a route cannot
be found without the use of a secondary road.
This selection will not always offer the shortest distance
or time to your destination.
Use Toll Roads: Choose Yes to calculate the best
route using toll roads wherever possible. This selection
will not always offer the shortest distance or time to
your destination.
Use Ferries: Choose Yes to calculate the best route
using ferries when possible. This selection will not
always offer the shortest distance or time to your
destination.
The following options will be available from the ROUTE
SETTING menu:
Minimize Time/Distance: The system will calculate the
fastest route or shortest route possible. Choose Time
for the fastest route or Dist for the shortest route.
4-32
Display Whole Route
Regional Maps
This feature allows you to display your entire planned
route. Total mileage and time to destination for the
planned route will be displayed on the map screen.
Touch Return to go back to the previous menu.
The maps are stored on a DVD-ROM. The
48 contiguous United States and portions of Canada are
contained on one disc. The U.S. map database
includes interstate freeways, state highways, country
roads, and major and general streets.
Calculate Route
This feature allows you to begin route calculation for the
selected destination.
Cancel Route
If you are traveling on a planned route and would like to
cancel it, touch Cancel Route. The system will ask
you to confirm by touching YES. Touch YES to confirm
cancellation of your planned route or touch Return to
keep your planned route.
Maps
This section includes basic information you need to
know about the map database.
Refer to the “Navigation System Map Disc” manual to
view the explanation of map coverage and detailed
city lists in each region. The map disc manual will be in
your map DVD case when the vehicle is delivered
from the factory.
When your vehicle is delivered from the factory, the
dealer may have installed the map DVD. If the map DVD
was not installed in your vehicle when first purchased,
do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. With the vehicle in PARK (P), press and hold the
TILT key until a beep is heard. The system’s
faceplate will open.
3. If already loaded, the map DVD or a CD will eject
from the slot.
4-33
4. Load the map DVD into the slot by inserting it
partway. The system will pull it in.
5. Press and release the TILT key to close the
faceplate.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) with the system’s
faceplate open will cause the faceplate to close
automatically. This could cause damage to a
CD, DVD or the system if it is partially loaded. Before
shifting out of PARK (P), make sure that the DVD
or CD is loaded properly. The vehicle must be
shifted back into PARK (P) to close the faceplate.
Once the map DVD is inserted correctly, you will
have the following two choices:
• LANGUAGE
• I AGREE
You can change the language at this time. See
“Language” under Navigation Audio System on
page 4-45 for more information on choosing a language.
Once a language has been selected, touch I AGREE
to plan a route. The map will appear showing your
current vehicle position.
4-34
Setting the Search Area
To determine or change the system’s search area, do
the following:
1. Press the ROUTE key.
2. Touch the Enter Destination screen button.
3. Touch Change under
the Search Area
heading. The system
will display a map
with each region
represented.
Map Adjustments
The system allows you to adjust the scale of view on
the map. The map will scroll automatically based on the
direction you are traveling.
Map Scales
To view a larger or smaller
scale of the map, touch
the map scale arrows.
4. Select the desired region by touching the appropriate
screen button to the left of the U.S. map. The name
of the states or the country included in the selected
region will be displayed at the bottom of the screen
and the region will be highlighted.
5. Touch Enter to set the region as the search area.
6. Touch Return to go back to the previous screen.
You may also adjust the scale of the map by touching
the scale on the bar. The scale of a map can range from
1/32 of a mile (0.05 km) to 128 miles (256 km).
4-35
Scrolling the Map
Symbols
Touch anywhere on the
map screen twice to
display the scroll symbol.
The following symbols are the most common that
appear on a map screen.
Your vehicle is shown as
this symbol. It indicates the
current position and
heading direction of your
vehicle on the map.
Place your finger on the map screen in any direction
outside of the scroll symbol to scroll in that direction. The
map will continue to scroll until you remove your finger.
If your vehicle is in PARK (P), the system will initially
scroll at a slower rate. The rate will increase if you
continue to touch the map screen.
If your vehicle is in motion, there is one scroll speed
and a limited distance to scroll. You must keep touching
the map screen to scroll a longer distance.
If your vehicle icon becomes lost while scrolling, press
the MAP key to show the vehicle’s current location.
You may also use the scroll feature to set a destination.
See “Set by Map” under Enter Destination on page 4-21.
4-36
This symbol will appear on
the map to show your
destination after a route
has been planned.
See Enter Destination on page 4-21 for more information
on planning a route.
You will see this type of
symbol on the map when
a waypoint has been
planned.
This symbol indicates the
distance and estimated
travel time to your
final destination. The
Estimated Travel Time
feature must be on
for estimated travel time to
be displayed.
The waypoint symbol will be numbered from 1 through 5
depending on how many waypoints have been set.
See Edit Waypoint on page 4-17 for more information
on adding waypoints.
This symbol indicates the
distance to your final
destination.
This symbol indicates
the distance to your
final destination in a
straight line.
This symbol will appear before route guidance begins or
if you are on a road where route guidance is not
available.
4-37
This symbol indicates the
map with North up.
While in North up mode, North will always be at the top
of the map screen regardless of which direction the
vehicle is traveling.
This symbol indicates the
map with the vehicle travel
direction up, or Heading up.
The shaded triangle indicates North. While in Heading
up mode, the direction your vehicle is traveling will
always be at the top of the map screen.
Touch either the North Up heading symbol or the vehicle
Heading Up symbol to alternate between settings.
4-38
This symbol will appear
when the navigation
system is unable to receive
the GPS signal.
See Global Positioning System (GPS) on page 4-42 for
more information.
When a point of interest
(POI) or street address
name is too long to
be displayed, an arrow
will appear.
Touch the right or left arrow to scroll through the
entire name.
This symbol indicates the
position of the next turn
instruction.
With these options, you can do the following:
While on a planned route,
touch this symbol to
display the DEST MAP,
WHOLE, and TURN LIST
options.
Dest (Destination) Map: This option allows you to view
the final destination location. The destination’s name
or address will be displayed on the map screen. Touch
Return when finished.
4-39
Whole: This option allows you to view the entire
planned route. The distance to destination will be
displayed on the map screen. Touch Return when
finished.
Turn List: This option allows you to view a step-by-step
listing of upcoming street names, the distance that
you will travel on the road, and turns you will need to
make during your planned route.
After touching Turn List, the system may take some
time to create the list. The length of time will vary
depending on the length of your route and the planning
methods you have selected.
4-40
The turn list will read from bottom to top. The bottom
street name is the street you are currently on. The
system automatically updates this screen as you make
each turn. You may also touch the scroll up and
down arrows providing scroll is available. Touching the
down arrow will bring you to your current location.
Touching the up arrow will give you upcoming streets.
At times, there may not be names available for entrance
or exit ramps.
To avoid a turn, touch AVOID next to the turn you want
to avoid. You can use REDUCE or ENLARGE to edit
the avoided point. Touch Reroute or press the MAP key
to calculate your new route.
Touch Return to view your current position and to turn
the turn list screen off.
Touch REROUTE or press the MAP key to calculate a
new route.
Auto Reroute
When your destination is set and you travel off of the
planned route, the system will automatically begin
to reroute you. You will see the new route highlighted
on the screen.
Traveling Across Regions
If you plan to drive across several states, you may have
to change the selected region to represent the area
you are traveling to.
There are two ways you can plan a destination when
traveling across regions.
The following method is suggested and provides the
most route guidance and map display functions:
1. Change the selected search area region when you
get closer to the area you are traveling to. See
“Setting the Search Area” under Maps on
page 4-33.
2. Enter your destination and route settings. See Enter
Destination on page 4-21 for more information.
4-41
If you do not want to use the first method, keep your
currently selected search area region and enter your
destination. This method allows you only to select a
destination from the easy planning route method or from
the All Points of Interest (POI) categories with the “All
Search Areas” comment for US Only. For example,
Tourist is a category that features this comment. See
Enter Destination on page 4-21 for more information.
If you are traveling in or to Canada and you cross the
regional border, the only map scale views available
are 4 mi, 8 mi, 31 mi, and 128 mi (8 km, 16 km,
64 km and 256 km). Change the selected search area
region when you get closer to the area you are traveling
to. See “Setting the Search Area” under Maps on
page 4-33 for more information.
Remote Keyless Entry System
When you insert the key in the ignition, Driver 1 or
Driver 2 will be displayed on the screen. A message will
not appear on the screen if the driver is unknown. The
number on the back of the RKE transmitter corresponds
to driver 1 or driver 2. The navigation system can store
memory points for drivers 1 and 2 individually. See
Keyless Access System on page 2-4 for more
information.
4-42
OnStar® System
When using the OnStar® system, the audio system will
be muted and the navigation voice prompts will be
disabled during the call. The volume of the OnStar® call
can be adjusted by using the steering wheel volume
controls. See OnStar® System on page 2-36 for
more information.
Global Positioning System (GPS)
The navigation system determines the position of your
vehicle by using satellite signals, various vehicle signals,
and map data.
The Global Positioning System (GPS) locates the
current position of your vehicle using signals sent by the
United States Department of Defense GPS satellites.
While your vehicle is receiving signals from these
satellites, the GPS symbol will not appear on the map
screen. See Symbols on page 4-36 for more information
on the GPS symbol.
However, at times, other interferences such as the
satellite condition, road configuration, the condition of
the vehicle, and/or other circumstances can interfere
with the system’s ability to determine the accurate
position of the vehicle. This is when the GPS symbol
will appear on the map screen.
This system may not be available/or interferences may
occur if any of the following are true:
• Signal are obstructed by tall buildings, large trucks,
or a tunnels.
• Satellites are being repaired or improved.
• Objects are located on the rear shelf.
• After-market glass tinting has been applied to the
vehicle’s windows.
Notice: Do not apply after-market glass tinting to
the vehicle’s windows. Glass tinting will interfere
with the system’s ability to receive GPS signals and
cause the system to malfunction. You might have
to replace the window to correct the problem.
This would not be covered by your warranty.
If you are experiencing a problem, see Vehicle
Positioning on page 4-43 or Problems with Route
Guidance on page 4-44 for more information.
Vehicle Positioning
At times, the position of the vehicle on the map may be
inaccurate due to one or more of the following reasons:
• The road system has changed.
• The vehicle is traveling on slippery road surfaces
such as sand, gravel, and/or snow.
• The vehicle is being driven on winding roads.
• The vehicle is being driven on a long straight road.
• The vehicle is approaching a tall building or a large
vehicle.
• The surface streets run parallel to a freeway.
• The vehicle has just been transferred by a vehicle
carrier or a ferry.
• The current position calibration is set incorrectly.
• The vehicle is being driven at high speeds.
4-43
• The vehicle is repeating a change of direction by
going forward and backward, or turning on a turn
table in a parking lot.
• The vehicle is entering and/or exiting a parking lot or
garage with a roof.
• The vehicle has a roof carrier, ski, or bike rack
installed on it.
•
•
•
•
•
•
The vehicle has tire chains on it.
The tires have been replaced.
The tire pressure is incorrect.
The tires are worn.
The battery is disconnected.
The vehicle is driven in heavy traffic where driving is
at low speeds and the vehicle is stopped and started
repeatedly.
Problems with Route Guidance
Inappropriate route guidance may occur under any of
the following conditions:
• You have not turned onto the road indicated by
the system.
•
•
•
•
Route guidance is not available for the next turn.
The route is not changed during automatic rerouting.
Plural names of places are displayed.
You are driving at high speeds, which may cause
the automatic rerouting to operate more slowly.
• The route prohibits the entry of a vehicle due to a
regulation by time or season or any other regulation
which may be given.
• A route cannot be found.
• A road is new, was recently changed or is not listed
on the DVD. The route to the destination may not
be shown. See Ordering Map DVDs on page 4-45.
4-44
If the System Needs Service
Navigation Audio System
If you are still experiencing difficulty with your navigation
system after reading this information, see your dealer
for assistance.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone, or two-way radio, make sure that it can
be added by checking with your dealer. Also,
check federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone units. If sound equipment can be added,
it is very important to do it properly. Added
sound equipment may interfere with the operation
of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems,
and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may
interfere with the operation of sound equipment
that has been added improperly.
Ordering Map DVDs
The map DVD in your vehicle is the most up-to-date
information available when your vehicle was purchased.
The map DVD is updated periodically, provided that
the map information has changed. To order a new map
DVD, contact your dealer.
Database Coverage Explanations
Coverage areas vary with respect to the level of map
detail available for any given area. Some areas will
feature greater levels of detail than others. If this
happens, it does not mean there is a problem with the
system. As the map DVD is updated, more detail
may become available for areas which previously had
limited detail. See Ordering Map DVDs on page 4-45.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be
played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-22 for more
information.
The audio system is operated using navigation system
menus. The audio menus are explained in this section.
4-45
Main Audio Menu
e/ z (Audio/Adjust): Press this key to view the
main audio screen.
Preset Selection: Here you can program the audio
system’s presets to recall your home settings by
touching HOME. You can also recall the presets you
use when traveling to another area by touching AWAY.
See “Preset Station Menu” later in this section for
more information on how to store preset stations.
The Home and Away feature is not available for the
XM™ Satellite Radio source, if equipped.
4-46
Display Presets on the Map: With this feature on,
your audio system presets for the current audio source
will be displayed on the left of the map screen.
Touch ON to turn this feature on. You may also choose
to turn this feature off.
With this feature on, you can recall your preset radio
stations from the map screen. You cannot store preset
stations from the map screen. You must do this from
the audio screen. See “Preset Station Menu” later in this
section for more information on storing presets.
Automatic Volume Control (AVC): To use AVC,
touch the ON button. Your vehicle is equipped with
Bose AudioPilot® noise compensation technology.
AudioPilot® automatically adjusts the volume level of
the audio so that it always sounds the same to you.
This feature is most effective at lower volume settings
where background noise may be louder than the
audio. At high volume settings there may be little or no
change in the audio level. In some cases where the
noise level changes quickly, you may hear the audio
level changing. This is normal. For additional information
on AudioPilot® please visit www.bose.com.
8 (Clock): Touch this screen button to get to the
CLOCK ADJUST menu. See “Clock Adjust Menu” later
in this section for more information.
SCREEN ADJUST: To adjust the brightness or contrast
of the screen, touch SCREEN ADJUST to display the
screen adjust menu. See “Screen Adjust Menu” later in
this section for more information.
SOUND: Touch this screen button to access the Sound
menu. See “Sound Menu” later in this section for
more information.
DSP (Digital Signal Processing): Touch this screen
button to access the DSP menu. See “Adjusting
the Speakers” later in this section for more information.
4-47
Clock Adjust Menu
GPS TIME: The current GPS time will be displayed to
the right of this screen button. Touch GPS TIME to
set the navigation system time to match current GPS
time. If the seconds for the present minute are greater
than thirty when GPS TIME is selected, the clock
will round up to the next minute.
Daylight Saving Time: Touch this screen button to
increase the time setting by one hour. Then touch GPS
TIME to save the new setting. If the screen button is light
blue, the daylight savings time feature is on. If the button
is dark blue, the daylight savings time feature is off.
The following options are available from this menu:
HOUR/MIN.: Touch the up or down arrows to increase or
decrease the hour or minutes. If you touch and hold one
of the arrows, the numbers will advance quickly.
12H/24H: Touch 12H to set the clock in standard time
or 24H to set the clock in military time.
4-48
TIME ZONE: The selected time zone will appear to the
right of this screen button. Touch this screen button
to toggle between time zones and select the desired
one. The time of the selected zone will be displayed to
the right of the GPS TIME screen button. To set the
clock to the new setting, touch GPS TIME.
If the system is not receiving GPS information, you can
still set the time manually as described above but
the GPS time and Daylight Saving Time features will not
be available.
Touch Return to go back to the previous menu.
Screen Adjust Menu
!(Brightness):
Touch the plus (+) or minus (−) signs
to adjust the brightness of the screen.
You will see the screen change. Touch SET to confirm
the setting.
AUTO: This setting automatically adjusts the contrast
and brightness of the screen depending on exterior
lighting conditions.
DAY: This setting leaves the screen in day mode. Day
mode is best suited for daylight conditions.
NIGHT: This setting leaves the screen in night mode.
Night mode is best suited for nighttime conditions.
SCREEN OFF: Touch SCREEN OFF to turn off the
screen. Press any hard key to turn the screen back on.
The following options are available from this menu:
K (Contrast):
Touch the plus (+) or minus (−) signs
to adjust the contrast of the screen.
SET: Touch SET to save your choices and exit the
CLOCK ADJUST menu.
You will see the screen change. Touch SET to confirm
the setting.
4-49
Language
Finding a Station
Your vehicle has been set for the English language. If you
wish to change the language, you must do so through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 3-61 for more information.
If the language is changed from English, a majority of the
voice guidance prompts and screen text will change to
the selected language. Remember, the menu screens will
not match word-for-word as they appear in this manual.
Playing the Radio
PWR-VOL (Power-Volume): Press this knob to turn
the audio and navigation systems on and off. Turn
the knob to increase or decrease the volume to
the audio system.
«TUNE/SEEK ª:
Press the up or down arrow to go
to the next or previous station and stay there.
BAND: Press this key to switch between AM, FM1,
FM2, XM1, XM 2, or WX, if equipped. If you are on a
map screen and press this key, the screen will not
change but the audio source will.
4-50
FM1 audio source shown, other sources similar
Press the BAND key to switch between AM, FM1, FM2,
XM1, XM2, or WX, if equipped. Touch the desired
audio source to select it.
Preset Station Menu
Up to 36 stations, 6 AM, 6 FM 1, 6 FM 2, 6 XM 1,
6 XM 2, and 6 WX, if equipped, can be programmed for
home and for away. To store presets, do the following:
1. Turn the audio system on.
2. Touch AM, FM, XM, or WX, if equipped, to display
the desired source. The preset station menu will
appear.
3. Tune to the desired station by using the
TUNE/SEEK arrows.
4. Touch SOUND to set the bass, mid-range, treble,
and DSP for your preset, if desired. See “Sound
Menu” later in this section for more information.
5. Touch and hold one of the six numbered preset
buttons for more than two seconds until you hear
a beep.
6. Repeat the steps for each preset and source.
SCAN: To scan stations, touch SCAN. The radio will go
to a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next station. Touch SCAN again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, touch and hold SCAN for two
seconds. It will only scan the audio source it is in, with the
exception of FM 1 and FM 2, which will both be scanned
if in that source. Touch SCAN again to stop scanning.
RDS (Radio Data System): See “Radio Data
System (RDS)” later in this section for more information.
MSG (Message): See “Radio Data System (RDS)”
later in this section for more information.
AutoSet: Touch AutoSet to replace currently stored
preset stations with the strongest stations available in
the immediate area. Touch AutoSet again to return
to the original preset stations.
SOUND: See “Sound Menu” following for more
information.
DSP: See “Adjusting the Speakers” later in this section
for more information.
4-51
Sound Menu
To adjust sound settings, do the following:
1. Touch the plus (+) or minus (−) signs to adjust
treble, mid-range, and bass.
2. Touch the L for left or R for right to adjust the
balance of the speakers.
3. Touch the F for front or R for rear to adjust the fade
of the speakers.
4. Touch DSP to adjust your DSP, if equipped. See
“Adjusting the Speakers” later in this section for
more information.
After adjustments are made, touch any source screen
button. This will take you back to the preset station
menu. Whenever you touch that screen button,
the previously stored information you have entered for
each preset station will be recalled.
Touch SOUND at the bottom of the main audio screen,
source menu, or DSP menu to change the tone, DSP, if
equipped, fade, and balance for all sources. The audio
system has a separate setting for these features for each
source preset. However, the audio system keeps one
fade and one balance setting for all audio sources.
4-52
To adjust the tone for each preset, do the following:
Adjusting the Speakers
1. Press the BAND key.
2. Touch AM, FM1, FM2, XM1, XM2, or WX, if
equipped, to access the desired preset screen.
3. Touch SOUND.
4. Touch the plus (+) or minus (−) signs to adjust
treble, mid-range, and bass.
5. Touch Return to exit. This will take you to the
preset station menu.
6. Touch and hold one of the six preset screen
buttons for more than two seconds until you hear
a beep.
Whenever you touch that preset for less than two
seconds, the station and previously stored
information you have entered for each preset
station will be recalled.
7. Repeat the steps for additional presets.
DSP (Digital Signal Processing): The DSP feature is
used to provide a choice of four different listening
experiences. DSP can be used while listening to the
audio system or the CD player. The audio system can
store separate DSP settings for each source and
preset station, except WX, which is always set to TALK.
To save DSP settings for your preset stations, use
the SOUND menu or touch DSP from the preset station
menu to access the DSP menu. See “Sound Menu”
listed previously in this section for more information.
4-53
Touch DSP to change the following options:
Radio Data Systems (RDS)
ON/OFF: Touch ON/OFF to turn DSP on and off.
DRIVER SEAT: Touch this button to adjust the audio to
give the driver the best possible sound quality.
TALK: TALK makes spoken words sound very clear.
Touch this button when listening to non-musical material
such as news, talk shows, and sports broadcasts.
SPACIOUS: Touch this button to make the listening
space seem larger.
SOUND: Touch SOUND to access the Sound menu.
See “Sound Menu” listed previously in this section
for more information.
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information. With RDS, the radio
can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
4-54
RDS: Touch RDS to use alternate RDS functions located
in the preset menu. When you touch RDS, you will only
have about five seconds to choose RDS ON/OFF, TA,
MSG, PTY, or SEL PTY. If you do not make a selection,
the system will return to the previous menu.
If you are tuned to a station broadcasting RDS
information, the station’s Program Service (PS) and
Program Type (PTY) will replace the station’s frequency
on the status line at the top of the display. After about
five seconds, if available, the PTY will be replaced
on the display by the station’s PTY name. The PTY and
PTY name may be the same or different.
If the audio system is tuned to a station that is not
broadcasting RDS information, the station’s frequency
will remain on the display. While RDS is on, the
audio system will search for a stronger station in the
network if a station gets too weak for listening.
The RDS feature relies upon receiving specific
information from RDS stations. These features will only
work when RDS information is available.
TA (Traffic): Touch TA to receive traffic
announcements. The audio system will turn on the TA
display. TA will appear on the display if the current station
broadcasts traffic announcements. You may also receive
traffic announcements from stations in the network
related to the current station. If the current station does
not broadcast traffic announcements, the audio system
will seek to a station which will. When the audio system
finds a station which broadcasts traffic announcements, it
will stop. If no station is found, TA will turn off.
While a traffic announcement plays, the audio system
uses TA volume. To increase TA volume, touch the VOL
button on your steering wheel or use the VOL up or down
buttons during the announcement. See “Voice Guidance
Volume Settings” under Setup Menu on page 4-7 for
more information.
When a traffic announcement comes on the current radio
station or a related network station, you will hear it even if
the volume is muted or a CD is playing. If the audio
system tunes to a related network station for a traffic
announcement, it will return to the original station when
the announcement is finished. If the CD player was being
used, the CD will stay in the player and resume play at
the point where it stopped.
Touch RDS followed by TA again to turn TA off.
4-55
MSG (Message): When RDS is on, if the current
station has a message, MSG will appear on the display.
Touch MSG from the preset menu to view the
message. If the whole message does not appear on the
display, parts of the message will appear every three
seconds until the message is completed. Once the
complete message has been displayed, MSG will
disappear from the display until another new message
is received. MSG will remain available to allow you
to display the entire message again.
PTY: PTY allows you to seek only stations with types
of programs you want to listen to. This button is used to
turn on and off Program Type (PTY) features.
When the PTY display is on, press TUNE/SEEK and
SCAN to find radio stations of the PTY selected. The last
PTY selected will be used for seek and scan modes.
If a station with the selected PTY is not found, NONE
FOUND will appear on the display. If both PTY and TA
are on, the audio system will search for stations with
traffic announcements and the selected PTY.
PTY (Program Type) Presets: The six presets let you
return to your favorite PTYs. These presets have
factory PTY preset stations. See “RDS Program Type
(PTY) Selections” later in this section. You can set up to
12 PTYs, 6 FM 1 and 6 FM2. To save a PTY preset,
do the following:
With RDS on, touch RDS, followed by PTY. The PTY
display will turn on. Touch RDS followed by this
button again to turn the PTY display off.
1. Touch FM1 or FM2.
Select PTY (Select Program Type): With RDS and
PTY on, touch RDS, then SEL PTY. The PTY menu will
appear. Use the up and down arrows to select a
PTY. Touch your PTY selection and the system will
return you to the screen with the preset stations shown.
See Steps 1 through 7 under “Preset Station Menu”
to store the selected PTYs. The selected PTY is then
stored on the preset. You can now touch the PTY preset
to recall your settings.
4. Touch PTY.
4-56
2. Touch RDS to enter the RDS menu.
3. Touch RDS ON/OFF to turn RDS on.
5. Touch SEL PTY and select the desired PTY from
the list.
6. Touch and hold one of the six presets for more
than two seconds until you hear a beep. Whenever
you touch that numbered preset for less than
two seconds, the PTY you set will return.
7. Repeat the steps for each preset.
Once you have stored a PTY for each of your preset
stations, you can recall a PTY preset by touching
the preset station for less than two seconds. Then use
TUNE/SEEK or SCAN to locate a station for that
PTY selection.
ALERT: This type of announcement warns of national or
local emergencies. You will not be able to turn off alert
announcements. Alert announcements will come on even
if RDS mode is turned off. ALERT appears on the display
when an alert announcement plays. The audio system
uses TA volume during these announcements. To
increase volume, touch the VOL button on your steering
wheel or use the VOL up and down buttons during the
announcement. See “Voice Guidance Volume Settings”
under Setup Menu on page 4-7 for more information.
When an alert announcement comes on the tuned radio
station or a related network station, you will hear it even if
the volume is muted or a CD is playing. If the audio
system tunes to a related network station for an alert
announcement, it will return to the original station when
the announcement is finished. If the CD player is playing,
the player will stop for the announcement and resume
when the announcement is finished.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the 48
contiguous United States. XM™ offers 100 coast to
coast channels including music, news, sports, talk, and
children’s programming. XM™ provides digital quality
audio and text information, including song title and artist
name. A service fee is required in order to receive
the XM™ service. For more information, contact XM™
at www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
4-57
INFO (Information): Touch INFO while in XM™ mode
to retrieve various pieces of information related to
the current song or channel. By touching INFO, you may
retrieve four different categories of information: Artist
Name/Feature, Song/Program Title, Channel Category,
and other Additional Information that may be broadcast
on that channel. Additional Information messages
may only be available at certain times or on certain
programs. If an Additional Information message is being
broadcast on the tuned channel, INFO will appear on
the display.
Each of the four information types may have multiple
pages of text. To reach a category, touch INFO
repeatedly until the desired type is displayed. If there
are multiple pages of text for the information selected
type, the radio will automatically display all the pages for
that type at a rate of about one page every three
seconds before timing out and returning to the default
display. You may override this feature by touching INFO
to review all of the pages at your own pace.
XL (Explicit Language Channels): XL on the radio
display, after the channel name, indicates content with
explicit language. These channels, or any others,
can be blocked at a customer’s request, by calling
1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
4-58
Setting Program Type (PTY) Preset
Stations
SCATT (Category):
Press the arrows to select a
category.
Once the desired category is displayed, press
TUNE/SEEK to select the category and take you to the
category’s first station. If you want to go to another
station within that category, press TUNE/SEEK once.
Touch and hold one of the desired P1-P6 presets
to store the selected station as a preset. If PTY times
out and is no longer on the display, start again.
SCAN: Use this button to scan through the channels
within a category or scan through the preset stations. To
scan through the channels in a category, do the following:
1. Select a category by using the category arrows.
2. Once the desired category is displayed, touch
SCAN. The radio will begin scanning within the
chosen category.
3. Touch SCAN again to stop scanning.
To scan through your preset stations, touch and hold
SCAN. Touch SCAN again to stop scanning.
XM Radio Messages
Radio Display Message Condition
Action Required
XM Updating
Updating encryption code The encryption code in your receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No XM Signal
Loss of signal
Your system is functioning correctly, but you are in a
location that is blocking the XM signal. When you move into
an open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
Your radio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
Channel Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune in to another
channel.
Channel Unavail
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of your
presets, you may need to choose another station for that
preset button.
No Artist Info
Artist Name/Feature not
available
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
Your system is working properly.
No Title Info
Song/Program Title not
available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. Your system is working properly.
No CAT Info
Category Name not
available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. Your system is working properly.
4-59
Radio Display Message Condition
Action Required
Not Found
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the category you
selected. Your system is working properly.
No Information
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this time
on this channel. Your system is working properly.
XM Theftlocked
Theft lock active
The XM receiver in your vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If you receive this
message after having your vehicle serviced, check with the
servicing facility.
XM Radio ID
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If you tune to channel 0, you will see this message
alternating with your XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This
label is needed to activate your service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If you receive this message when you tune to channel 0,
you may have a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.
Check XM Receivr
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
your receiver may have a fault. Consult with your retail
location.
4-60
Six-Disc CD Changer
With the compact disc changer, you can play up to six
normal size discs continuously.
When the radio is turned on, the changer will begin
checking for discs. This will continue for up to one and
a half minutes, depending on the number of discs
loaded. You may hear noise, but this is normal. The CD
changer is initializing.
Press the CD hard key to access the six-disc CD
changer screen. You can also use the system’s DVD
player for single CD play once the map DVD is removed.
See CD/DVD Player on page 4-63 for more information.
If no CD is loaded in the CD/DVD Player and you
press the CD hard key, the message “No CD Loaded”
will appear on the display.
CD Changer Screen
Once you access the CD changer screen, you can
select one of the numbered buttons to go from
one compact disc to another among those loaded in the
CD changer and use the arrows to rewind or fast
forward through the disc selected.
4-61
The following features are also available from this screen:
•
•
•
•
LOAD
EJECT
SCAN THE DISCS or SCAN THE TRACKS
and RANDOM ALL or RANDOM DISC.
The numbered buttons (1 through 6) represent the order
of the discs loaded in the changer. If there are only
two CDs loaded, buttons 1 and 2 will only be available
to choose from.
LOAD: Touch this button once each time you wish to
load a CD into the changer. It may take up to
10 seconds for the changer to accept the CD into the
slot depending on the changer initializing. Repeat
this procedure for loading up to six discs. Press and
hold the LOAD button until a beep is heard to put
the changer in LOAD ALL mode. Once the Insert CD
message is displayed, you can load all six discs,
one after the other.
r (Play):
Touch this button to begin playing a CD.
RANDOM DISC: Touch this button to hear the tracks in
random, rather than sequential, order on the disc
selected. Press the TUNE/SEEK hard key to randomly
seek through the tracks on this disc. Touch RANDOM
DISC again to turn off random play mode.
4-62
SCAN TRACKS: Touch this button to hear the first
10 seconds of each track on the selected disc. Touch
this button again to stop scanning. The CD will mute
while scanning.
r (Rewind): Touch this button to rewind quickly
through a track selection.
EJECT: Touch this button once to eject the chosen CD.
The chosen CD may be selected by first touching one
of the numbered buttons from 1 to 6. Repeat this
procedure for ejecting up to six discs from the changer.
If you press and hold the EJECT button until a beep
is heard, The system will begin to eject all of the discs
from the player. Once the CD is removed the next
will come out until they are all ejected.
j (Pause): Touch this button to pause CD play.
Touch it again to resume play or touch the play button.
RANDOM ALL: Touch this button to hear the tracks
on all of the discs in the CD changer in random, rather
than sequential, order. Press the TUNE/SEEK hard
key while RANDOM ALL is on to randomly seek within
that disc. Touch RANDOM ALL again to turn off
random mode.
SCAN DISCS: Touch this button to hear the first
10 seconds of first track on each disc. Touch this button
again to stop scanning. The CD will mute while scanning.
[ (Forward):
Touch this button to fast forward quickly
through a track selection.
«TUNE SEEK ª:
Press the up arrow on the TUNE/
SEEK switch to seek to the next selection on the compact
disc. If playing last track of disc, pressing the up arrow will
seek to the first track of the next disc. Press the down
arrow to seek to the previous selection on the compact
disc. If playing the first track of disc, pressing the down
arrow will seek to the last track on the selected disc. The
sound will mute while seeking.
RDS (Radio Data Systems): See “Radio Data Systems
(RDS)” listed previously for information on this button.
SOUND: See “Sound Menu (Tone, DSP, Fade and
Balance)” for information on this button.
DSP (Digital Signal Processing): See “Adjusting the
Speakers” listed previously for information on this button.
CD Changer Errors
CDX ERROR could be displayed for the following:
• The road is too rough. The disc should play when
the road is smoother.
• The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or not loaded label
side up.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, please contact your dealer dealer. If your
audio system displays an error number, write it down
and provide this information to your dealer when
reporting the problem.
CD/DVD Player
The player that is used for the navigation map DVD can
also be used as a single music CD player or a video
DVD player.
4-63
CD Player
To use the player as a single music CD player, you
must first remove the navigation map DVD. While
playing a CD in the CD/DVD Player, the navigation
system is not available. The message “The disc installed
is not a map DVD” will appear on the display if any of
the navigation hard keys are pressed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) with the system’s
faceplate open will cause the faceplate to close
automatically. This could cause damage to a
CD, DVD or the system if it is partially loaded. Before
shifting out of PARK (P), make sure that the DVD
or CD is loaded properly. The vehicle must be
shifted back into PARK (P) to close the faceplate.
To remove the navigation map DVD and load a music
CD, use the following steps:
1. Start the vehicle.
2. Press the TILT hard key until you hear a beep. This
will open the faceplate of the system.
3. If one is loaded, the navigation map DVD will eject
from the slot.
4. Gently remove the navigation map DVD from the
slot and return it to its case.
5. Insert the music CD into the slot. The system will
pull the CD into the player.
6. Press and release the TILT hard key to close the
faceplate.
CD Player Screen
Once a music CD is loaded, the CD player menu will
appear on the display. When using the system as
a single CD player, the CD hard key will alternate
between the CD player and the six-disc CD changer if
CDs are loaded.
4-64
r (Play):
Touch this button to begin playing a CD.
RANDOM: Touch this button to hear the tracks in
random, rather than sequential, order on the disc. Touch
RANDOM again to turn off random mode.
SCAN TRACKS: Touch this button to hear the first
10 seconds of each track on the disc. Touch this button
again to stop scanning. The CD will mute while scanning.
REPEAT TRACK: Touch this button to repeat the
selected track.
r (Rewind): Touch this button to rewind quickly
through a track selection.
j (Pause): Touch this button to pause CD play.
Touch it again to resume play or touch the play button.
[ (Forward):
Touch this button to fast forward
quickly through a track selection.
«TUNE SEEK ª: Touch the up arrow on the
TUNE/SEEK hard key to seek to the next selection on
the compact disc. If playing the last track of the disc,
touching the up arrow will seek to the first track of the
disc. Touch the down arrow to seek to the previous
selection on the compact disc. If playing the first track of
the disc, touching the down arrow will seek to the last
track of the disc. The sound will mute while seeking.
DVD Player
To use the player as a video DVD player, you must first
remove the navigation map DVD or music CD. While
playing a video DVD, the navigation system is not
available. The message “The disc installed is not a map
DVD” will appear on the display if any of the navigation
hard keys are pressed.
This feature will not operate unless the vehicle is in
PARK (P).
To remove the navigation map DVD and load a video
DVD, use the following steps:
1. With the vehicle in PARK (P) and the vehicle
running, press the TILT hard key until a beep
is heard. The faceplate of the system will open.
2. If a map DVD or a music CD is loaded, the system
will automatically eject it. Gently remove it from the
slot and return it to its case.
4-65
3. Load the video DVD into the slot. The system will
pull the DVD into the player.
4. Press and release the TILT hard key to close the
faceplate.
DVD Menu Options
To display the menu choices while a DVD is playing,
touch anywhere on the screen and the menu will appear.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) with the system’s
faceplate open will cause the faceplate to close
automatically. This could cause damage to a
CD, DVD or the system if it is partially loaded. Before
shifting out of PARK (P), make sure that the DVD
or CD is loaded properly. The vehicle must be
shifted back into PARK (P) to close the faceplate.
Once the faceplate is closed and a video DVD is loaded,
the system will automatically play the DVD.
Playing a DVD
There are three ways to play a DVD depending on
which screen you are on. They are the following:
• Once a DVD is inserted, the system will
automatically play the DVD.
• If you are on a map screen, touch the DVD source
button.
• From the audio screen, press the DVD hard key.
4-66
IMAGE: Touch this button to either start playing a DVD
or to remove the DVD menu screen.
AUDIO PROGRAM: Touch this button to change the
audio language heard.
VIEWING ANGLE: Touch this button to adjust the
viewing angle of the DVD. Some DVDs allow you to
change the camera angle. This may not be available on
all DVDs. Depending on the type of DVD you are
using, this button may or may not be available.
SUBTITLE: Touch this button to playback the video
with subtitles. This may not be available on all DVDs.
Depending on the type of DVD you are using, this button
may or may not be available.
SCREEN ADJUST: Touch this button to adjust the
brightness, contrast and red/green color adjustments.
CURSOR: Touch this button to access the left/right and
up/down cursors on the screen. The cursors allow
you to navigate menu options on the screen.
MENU: Touch this button to access the DVDs menu
options. Depending on the type of DVD you are
using, this button may or may not be available. Touch
the button labeled one, two or blank to change the
image size displayed on the screen.
If TITLE is available, this button will allow you to
navigate through chapters or the DVD features. Once
the appropriate title or track has been selected,
press the Return button then the IMAGE button on the
DVD menu to view the movie in full screen.
TITLE: Touch this button to display the title of the DVD.
Depending on the type of DVD you are using, this
button may or may not be available.
4-67
SETTING: Touch this button to adjust the following:
• LANGUAGE PREFERENCES
• PARENTAL LOCK
Under LANGUAGE PREFERENCES, you can select
different languages for AUDIO, SUBTITLE and
DVD MENUS.
1. To change languages, first select the option you
wish to change.
SEARCH: Touch this button to search to a certain
scene on the DVD. Depending on the type of DVD you
are using, this button may or may not be available.
r (Rewind): Touch this button to rewind through a
scene during playback.
r (Resume): Touch this button to resume playing a
DVD.
2. Select a language from the list given.
c (Stop):
3. Touch RETURN to end out the menu. Your
language is now saved.
j (Pause):
Touch this button to stop the DVD.
Touch this button to pause the DVD.
Under PARENTAL LOCK, you can select SET RATING
LIMIT and SET PIN.
[ (Forward):
To SET RATING, first touch the button. Then, make
your selection. Touch RETURN to end out the menu.
Your selection is now saved.
L (Frame Advance):
To use PARENTAL LOCK, first touch the button. Then,
enter a four-digit numeric password. Touch RETURN
to end out the menu.
4-68
Touch this button to advance rapidly
during playback.
Touch this button to advance by
chapter during playback.
Radio Personalization with Home
and Away Feature
With this feature, you can recall the latest audio system
settings as adjusted the last time your vehicle was
operated. This feature allows two different drivers to store
and recall their own audio system settings. The settings
recalled by the audio system are determined by which
RKE transmitter (1 or 2) was used to enter the vehicle.
The number on the back of the RKE transmitter
corresponds to driver 1 or to driver 2. The audio system
settings will automatically adjust to where they were last
set by the identified driver. The settings can also be
recalled by briefly pressing the MEMORY seat switches 1
or 2 located on the driver’s door.
Your audio system can store HOME and AWAY preset
stations. HOME and AWAY preset stations allow
you to use one set of preset radio settings in the area
where you live, and another set when you go out of
town. That way, you will not need to reprogram
your preset stations every time you travel.
To select HOME and AWAY preset stations, do the
following:
1. With the audio system on, touch the Audio hard key
and turn the audio system off.
2. Touch the HOME or AWAY button from the main
audio screen.
The next time the audio system is turned on, the
system will recall the last active preset selection.
When battery power is removed and later applied, you
will not have to reset your home audio system preset
stations because the audio system remembers
them. However, you will have to reset your away radio
preset stations.
Voice Recognition
The navigation system’s voice recognition allows for
hands-free operation of navigation and audio system
features. Voice recognition can be used when the ignition
is in on or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
is active.
This feature only works if the map DVD is inserted and
I AGREE has been selected. If you try to use voice
recognition without the map DVD inserted, the system
will display “Please insert the navigation map DVD
to use the voice recognition feature.”
4-69
To use navigation voice recognition, do the following:
1. Press the talk symbol
steering wheel control
and release it when
you hear a beep. The
audio system, if on,
will mute.
The system will only recognize commands spoken in
English.
Voice Recognition Commands
The following list shows all of the voice commands
available for the navigation system with a brief
description of each. To use the voice commands, refer
to the instructions listed previously.
Help Commands
2. Clearly state one of the commands listed on the
following pages. For example, say “FM1”.
These commands are universal and will enable you to
use the help prompts available from the system.
3. The system will tell you the command being
implemented. For example, the system will
say “FM1 Radio” and change the audio system to
the FM1 source.
Map Help: This command will enable the system to
provide the available commands for the map screen.
You can end voice recognition by not speaking any
commands. After about five seconds of silence,
the system will automatically cancel voice recognition.
At times, the system may not understand a spoken
command. If this happens, try again. If a spoken
command is not available, the system will provide
feedback based on availability.
While using voice recognition, make sure to keep
interior noise levels to a minimum. Otherwise, the
system might not recognize voice commands.
4-70
Destination Help: This command will enable the
system to provide the available commands for entering
a destination.
Guidance Help: This command will enable the system
to provide the available commands for the guidance
method.
Radio Help: This command will enable the system to
provide the available commands for the radio.
Disc Help: This command will enable the system to
provide the available commands for the CD changer.
Radio Commands
Radio: This command will change the audio system to
the next radio audio source.
AM: This command will change the audio system to the
AM audio source.
Seek Up: This command will cause the selected audio
source to seek up to the next strongest signal.
Seek Down: This command will cause the selected
audio source to seek down to the next strongest signal.
Stop Scan: This command will cause the audio
source to stop scanning for the next strongest signal.
FM1: This command will change the audio system to
the FM1 audio source.
CD Changer Commands
FM2: This command will change the audio system to
the FM2 audio source.
Track Up: This command will cause the CD changer to
skip up to the next track.
XM1: This command will change the audio system to
the XM1 audio source.
Previous Track, Track Down: This command will
cause the CD changer to go to the previous track.
XM2: This command will change the audio system to
the XM2 audio source.
Screen Commands
CD Changer: This command will change the audio
system to the CD changer audio source.
Screen Day Mode, Day Mode On: These commands
will adjust the system’s screen setting to the day mode.
WX, Weather Band: These commands will change the
audio system to the weather band audio source.
Screen Night Mode, Night Mode On: These
commands will adjust the system’s screen setting to the
night mode.
Power On, Audio On: These commands will turn the
system’s power on.
Screen Auto Mode, Auto Mode On: These commands
will adjust the system’s screen setting to auto mode.
Power Off, Audio Off: These commands will turn the
system’s power off.
Screen Off: This command will turn the system’s
screen display off.
4-71
Position Commands
Current Position, Current Location, Show Current
Position, Show Current Location: These commands
will cause the system to display the vehicle’s current
location on the map screen.
Map: This command will cause the system to display
the map screen.
Map Commands
North Up, Change to North Up: These commands will
cause the system to display the North Up heading
when on the map screen if the map scale is set
to 2 miles (4 km) or less.
Map Direction, Change Map Direction: These
commands will cause the system to change the vehicle’s
direction from North Up to Heading Up or Heading Up
to North Up on the map screen if the map scale is set to
2 miles (4 km) or less.
Zoom In: This command will cause the system to zoom
in when on the map screen.
Mark, Mark This Point: These commands will cause
the system to mark the location as a memory point while
on the map screen.
Zoom Out: This command will cause the system to
zoom out when on the map screen.
Destination Commands
Maximum Scale: This command will cause the system
to zoom out to the maximum available map scale
when on the map screen.
Minimum Scale: This command will cause the system
to zoom in to the minimum available map scale when
on the map screen.
Heading Up, Change to Heading Up: These
commands will cause the system to display the Vehicle
Up heading when on the map screen. The map scale
should be set for under 2 miles (4 km).
4-72
Home, Go Home: These commands will cause the
system to enter the Home destination, if one is set.
Go To Starting Point, Previous Starting Point: These
commands will cause the system to enter the last
available starting point as a destination.
Guidance Commands
Repeat Guidance, Repeat Voice: These commands
will cause the system to repeat the last available
voice prompt guidance command if a destination has
been set.
Louder: This command will cause the system to
increase the volume of the navigation voice prompts if a
destination has been set.
Softer: This command will cause the system to
decrease the volume of the navigation voice prompts if
a destination has been set.
Voice Guidance Off: This command will cause the
system to turn off the navigation voice prompts if
a destination has been set.
Voice Guidance On: This command will cause the
system to turn on the navigation voice prompts if
a destination has been set.
Open Guidance, Open Guidance Screen, Open
Guide, Open Guide Screen: These commands will
cause the system to open the Guidance Appearance
menu if a destination has been set.
Close Guidance, Close Guidance Screen, Close
Guide, Close Guide Screen: These commands
will cause the system to close the Guidance Appearance
menu if a destination has been set.
Arrow Guidance, Arrow Guide, Change To Arrow
Guidance, Change To Arrow Guide: These
commands will cause the system to change to Arrow
Guidance screen view in the Guidance Menu if a
destination has been set.
Turn List Guidance, Turn List Guide, Change to
Turn List Guidance, Change to Turn List
Guide: These commands will cause the system to
change to Turn List Guidance screen view in the
Guidance Menu if a destination has been set.
Entire Route, Entire Route Map, Route Overview:
These commands will cause the system to display the
entire route if a destination has been set.
Reroute: This command will cause the system to
generate an alternate route to a set destination while on
a planned route.
Detour, Detour Entire Route: These commands will
cause the system to activate the detour feature
when driving a planned route.
Delete Destination, Cancel Destination: These
commands will cancel a destination if one has been set.
Next Waypoint Map: This command will cause the
system to display the map view of the next waypoint
location if one has been set.
4-73
First Waypoint Map: This command will cause the
system to display the map view of the first waypoint
location if one has been set.
Second Waypoint Map: This command will cause the
system to display the map view of the second waypoint
location if more than one waypoint has been set.
Third Waypoint Map: This command will cause the
system to display the map view of the third waypoint
location if more than two waypoints have been set.
Fourth Waypoint Map: This command will cause the
system to display the map view of the fourth waypoint
location if more than three waypoints have been set.
Fifth Waypoint Map: This command will cause
the system to display the map view of the fifth waypoint
location if more than four waypoints have been set.
Destination Map: This command will cause the system
to display the map view of the final destination location
if one has been set.
Point of Interest (POI) Commands
The following commands will cause the system to display
icons if they are available on the map screen when the
map scale is set to a half mile (eight-tenths km) or less.
Restaurant, I’m Hungry: These commands will cause
the system to display restaurant POI icons.
American Restaurant, American Food: These
commands will cause the system to display American
restaurant POI icons.
Chinese Restaurant, Chinese Food: These
commands will cause the system to display Chinese
restaurant POI icons.
Continental Restaurant, Continental Food: These
commands will cause the system to display Continental
restaurant POI icons.
French Restaurant, French Food: These commands
will cause the system to display French restaurant
POI icons.
Italian Restaurant, Italian Food: These commands will
cause the system to display Italian restaurant POI icons.
4-74
Japanese Restaurant, Japanese Food: These
commands will cause the system to display Japanese
restaurant POI icons.
Mexican Restaurant, Mexican Food: These
commands will cause the system to display Mexican
restaurant POI icons.
Seafood Restaurant, Seafood: These commands will
cause the system to display Seafood restaurant POI
icons.
Rental Car Agency: This command will cause the
system to display rental car POI icons.
Automobile Club, Triple A: These commands will
cause the system to display auto club POI icons.
Auto Service And Maintenance, Auto Service,
Maintenance: These commands will cause the system
to display auto service POI icons.
Hotel: This command will cause the system to display
hotel POI icons.
Other Restaurant, Other Food: These commands will
cause the system to display other types of restaurant
POI icons.
Golf Course: This command will cause the system to
display golf course POI icons.
Shopping, Shopping Mall: These commands will
cause the system to display mall POI icons.
Ski Resort, Skiing: These commands will cause the
system to display ski resort POI icons.
Grocery Store: This command will cause the system to
display grocery store POI icons.
Amusement Park: This command will cause the
system to display amusement park POI icons.
Gas Station, Gas: These commands will cause the
system to display gas station POI icons.
Sport Complex, Stadium: These commands will cause
the system to display sports complex POI icons.
Parking Garage: This command will cause the system
to display parking garage POI icons.
Casino: This command will cause the system to display
casino POI icons.
Parking Lot: This command will cause the system to
display parking lot POI icons.
Marina: This command will cause the system to display
marina POI icons.
4-75
Tourist Attraction: This command will cause the
system to display tourist attraction POI icons.
Train Station: This command will cause the system to
display train station POI icons.
Winery: This command will cause the system to
display winery POI icons.
Airport: This command will cause the system to
display airport POI icons.
City Hall: This command will cause the system to
display city hall POI icons.
Bus Station: This command will cause the system to
display bus station POI icons.
Police Station: This command will cause the system to
display police station POI icons.
Commuter Rail Station: This command will cause the
system to display commuter rail station POI icons.
Library: This command will cause the system to
display library POI icons.
Ferry Terminal: This command will cause the system
to display ferry terminal POI icons.
Hospital: This command will cause the system to
display hospital POI icons.
Park & Ride: This command will cause the system to
display park & ride POI icons.
Park & Recreation, Parks & Recreation: These
commands will cause the system to display parks and
recreation POI icons.
Rest Area, Rest Stop: These commands will cause
the system to display rest area POI icons.
Civic Center, Community Center: These commands
will cause the system to display community center
POI icons.
Tourist Information: This command will cause the
system to display tourist information POI icons.
Historical Monument: This command will cause the
system to display historical monument POI icons.
Convention Center, Exhibition Center: These
commands will cause the system to display convention
center POI icons.
Performing Arts: This command will cause the system
to display performing arts POI icons.
Court House: This command will cause the system to
display court house POI icons.
Museum: This command will cause the system to
display museum POI icons.
4-76
Bank: This command will cause the system to display
bank POI icons.
Business Facility: This command will cause the
system to display business facility POI icons.
School: This command will cause the system to
display school POI icons.
City Center: This command will cause the system to
display city center POI icons.
ATM: This command will cause the system to display
ATM POI icons.
POI Off: This command will cause the system to turn
off POIs so they do not appear on the map screen.
Higher Education, University, College: These
commands will cause the system to display higher
education POI icons.
4-77
✍ NOTES
4-78
Section 5
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........5-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................5-2
Drunken Driving .............................................5-2
Control of a Vehicle ........................................5-5
Braking .........................................................5-5
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .........................5-6
Braking in Emergencies ...................................5-8
Traction Control System (TCS) .........................5-8
Magnetic Ride Control .....................................5-9
Limited-Slip Rear Axle .....................................5-9
StabiliTrak® System ......................................5-10
Steering ......................................................5-11
Off-Road Recovery .......................................5-13
Passing .......................................................5-14
Loss of Control .............................................5-15
Driving at Night ............................................5-16
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................5-18
City Driving ..................................................5-20
Freeway Driving ...........................................5-21
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................5-22
Highway Hypnosis ........................................5-23
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................5-23
Winter Driving ..............................................5-25
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ........5-29
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................5-30
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................5-30
Towing ..........................................................5-35
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................5-35
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................5-35
Towing a Trailer ...........................................5-35
5-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
reading, or reaching for something on the floor — makes
proper defensive driving more difficult and can even
cause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a passenger to
help do things like this, or pull off the road in a safe place
to do them yourself. These simple defensive driving
techniques could save your life.
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive
defensively.
Drunken Driving
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-5.
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads, or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following
distance. It is the best defensive driving maneuver, in
both city and rural driving. You never know when the
vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly.
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the driving
task — such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call,
5-2
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The person would reach the same BAC by drinking
three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed
drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors
like whiskey, gin, or vodka.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too
much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less
than many might think. Although it depends on each
person and situation, here is some general information
on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
According to the American Medical Association, a
180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
BAC of about 0.06 percent.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person
who consumes food just before or during drinking will
have a somewhat lower BAC level.
5-3
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight will when
each has the same number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada,
sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other
countries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is
0.05 percent in both France and Germany. The
BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States
is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six
drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen,
it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and
how quickly the person drinks them.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
5-4
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in
one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to
react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
Braking
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering, and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work at
the places where the tires meet the road.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, it is
easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. That means you can lose control of
your vehicle. See Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 5-8 and StabiliTrak® System on page 5-10.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it is pavement
or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of
the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
5-5
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
5-6
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced
electronic braking system that will help prevent a
braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You
may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on, and you may even notice that your
brake pedal moves a little. This is normal.
If there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system,
this warning light will
stay on. See Anti-Lock
Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-53.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to
the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
5-7
Using Anti-Lock
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may hear
a motor or clicking noise and feel the brake pedal
move a little during a stop, but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may
reengage the cruise control. See Adaptive Cruise
Control on page 3-16.
This warning light will
come on to let you know if
there is a problem with
your traction control
system.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle has a traction control system that limits
wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery
road conditions. The system operates only if it senses
that one or both of the rear wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction. When this happens,
the system works the rear brakes and reduces engine
power to limit wheel spin.
The TRAC SYSTEM ACTIVE message will display on
the Driver Information Center (DIC) when the traction
control system is limiting wheel spin. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-64. You may feel or hear
the system working, but this is normal.
5-8
See Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light on
page 3-53. When this warning light is on, the system will
not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
The traction control system automatically comes
on whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin,
especially in slippery road conditions, you should
always leave the system on. But you can turn the
traction control system off if you ever need to. You
should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck
in sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle is
required. See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on
page 5-30 and If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow on page 5-29 for more information.
To turn the system off,
press the front part of the
traction control button
located on the center
console.
Magnetic Ride Control
Magnetic Ride Control automatically adjusts the ride of
your vehicle. Automatic ride control is achieved through a
computer used to control and monitor the suspension
system. The controller receives input from various
sensors to determine the proper system response. If the
controller detects a problem within the system, the DIC
will display a SERVICE RIDE CONTROL message. See
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-64 for more
information. See your dealer for service.
Limited-Slip Rear Axle
The TRACTION SYSTEM-OFF message will display on
the DIC and the traction control system warning light
will come on. If the system is limiting wheel spin when
you press the button, the TRACTION SYSTEM-OFF
message will display – but the system will not turn
off right away. It will wait until there is no longer
a current need to limit wheel spin.
Your limited-slip rear axle can give you additional traction
on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like a
standard axle most of the time, but when one of the rear
wheels has no traction and the other does, this feature
will allow the wheel with traction to move the vehicle.
You can turn the system back on at any time by
pressing the button again. The TRACTION SYSTEM-ON
message should display briefly on the Driver Information
Center.
5-9
StabiliTrak® System
The StabiliTrak® System is a computer controlled
system that helps the driver maintain directional control
of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions. This is
accomplished by selectively applying any one of the
vehicle’s brakes.
When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive
away (6 mph (10 km/h)), especially during cold weather,
the message STABILITRAK WARMING may be
displayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC), the
instrument cluster light will be on, and a chime will
sound. This is normal. You can acknowledge this
message by pressing the RESET button. The
StabiliTrak® System performance is affected until the
message, STABILITRAK READY, is displayed in
the DIC. This can take up to 15 minutes.
The WAIT FOR STABILITRAK message may be
displayed in the DIC after exceeding 19 mph (30 km/h)
for 10 seconds if the steering is not centered. The
system is off until the STABILITRAK ACTIVE message
is displayed.
5-10
The STABILITRAK ACTIVE message will come on when
the system is operating. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-64 for more information. You may
also feel or hear the system working. This is normal.
The instrument cluster light
will come on and a chime
will sound to let you
know if there is a problem
with the system.
The SERVICE STABILITRAK message will also be
displayed. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 3-64 for more information.
When this light and the SERVICE STABILITRAK
message are on, the system is not operational. Adjust
your driving accordingly.
The system comes on automatically whenever you start
your vehicle. To help maintain directional control of the
vehicle, you should always leave the system on. You can
turn the system off if you ever need to. If you turn the
STABILITRAK® System off, the Traction Control System
will also be turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly.
To turn the system off,
press and hold the front
part of the traction
control button on the
console for five seconds
with the vehicle stopped.
You can turn the
system back on at any
time by pressing the
button.
The DIC will display the appropriate message when you
push the button, either TRAC/STABILITRAK ON or
TRAC/STABILITRAK OFF.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Magnetic Speed Variable Assist
Steering
Your vehicle is equipped with a steering system that
continuously adjusts the effort you feel when steering at
all vehicle speeds. It provides ease when parking,
yet a firm, solid feel at highway speeds.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If
you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you
will understand this.
5-11
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle
at which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you
are in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to do their
work where the tires meet the road. Adding the
sudden acceleration can demand too much of those
places. You can lose control. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 5-8.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
5-12
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective than
braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a
truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these
problems by braking — if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you cannot; there is not room. That is the time
for evasive action — steering around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes.
See Braking on page 5-5. It is better to remove as much
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.
Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
5-13
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides and
to crossroads for situations that might affect your
passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever
about making a successful pass, wait for a
better time.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it is all
right to pass, providing the road ahead is clear.
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
5-14
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For one
thing, following too closely reduces your area of
vision, especially if you are following a larger
vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space if
the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.
Keep back a reasonable distance.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and do
not get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
running start that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your
pass, you need only slow down and drop back again
and wait for another opportunity.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder and
check the blind spot.
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane. Remember that
your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you
just passed may seem to be farther away from you
than it really is.
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the next
vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may
be slowing down or starting to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you can
ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
5-15
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid only
the acceleration skid. If your traction control system is
off, then an acceleration skid is also best handled
by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Driving at Night
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you
will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow
on the road to make a mirrored surface — and
slow down when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
5-16
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One
reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired — by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
• Since you cannot see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But
as we get older these differences increase. A
50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your
eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you
are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They
may cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also
make a lot of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare, as from a driver
who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps, slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep
your eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from
night blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and
are not even aware of it.
5-17
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road,
and even people walking.
It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in
good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled
with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper
inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down before you
hit them.
{CAUTION:
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on
dry roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread
left, you will get even less traction. It is always wise to
go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while
you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when
your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
5-18
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or
more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on
the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone
poles, or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’s
surface, there could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If
you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water,
drive through them very slowly.
Driving Through Flowing Water
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can
be carried away. As little as six inches of
flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 6-46.
5-19
City Driving
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
See Freeway Driving on page 5-21.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
5-20
Freeway Driving
The most important advice on freeway driving is:
Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check
traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with
the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the
prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your
mirrors, and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes, or superhighways — are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your blind spot.
5-21
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance.
Expect to move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce your speed
according to your speedometer, not to your sense
of motion. After driving for any distance at higher
speeds, you may tend to think you are going slower
than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh — such as after
a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
and shoes you can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you
will find experienced and able service experts in GM
dealerships all across North America. They will be ready
and willing to help if you need it.
5-22
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are
all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the
wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Do
not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can
leave the road in less than a second, and you could
crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
5-23
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
{CAUTION:
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always
have your engine running and your vehicle in
gear when you go downhill.
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system,
and transmission. These parts can work hard
on mountain roads.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let your engine assist your brakes on a
steep downhill slope.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down to
•
•
•
5-24
a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine
and transmission, and you can climb the hill better.
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could
be something in your lane, like a stalled car or an
accident.
You may see highway signs on mountains that warn
of special problems. Examples are long grades,
passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area, or
winding roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate
action.
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
Also see Tires on page 6-46.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And,
if you will be driving under severe conditions, include
a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
5-25
Driving On Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You
will have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need to be
very careful.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.
5-26
But wet ice can be even more trouble because it may
offer the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it
is about freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain begins
to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand
crews can get there.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
Traction control improves your ability to accelerate when
driving on a slippery road. Even though your vehicle has
a traction control system, you will want to slow down and
adjust your driving to the road conditions. Under certain
conditions, you may want to turn the traction control
system off, such as when driving through deep snow and
loose gravel, to help maintain vehicle motion at lower
speeds. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5-8.
The StabiliTrak® System may also activate. See
StabiliTrak® System on page 5-10.
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road.
Even though you have the anti-lock braking system, you
will want to begin stopping sooner than you would on
dry pavement. See Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
on page 5-6.
• Allow greater following distance on any slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine until
you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such as
around clumps of trees, behind buildings, or under
bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or an
overpass may remain icy when the surrounding
roads are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of
you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brake while
you are actually on the ice, and avoid sudden
steering maneuvers.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
5-27
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
5-28
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help
keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do
some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until
help comes.
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice
or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to
spin your wheels too fast. The method known as rocking
can help you get out when you are stuck, but you
must use caution.
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured.
And, the transmission or other parts of the
vehicle can overheat. That could cause an
engine compartment fire or other damage.
When you are stuck, spin the wheels as little as
possible. Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph
(55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer.
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transmission
back and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
For more information about using tire chains on your
vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 6-63.
5-29
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading Your Vehicle
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That
will clear the area around your front wheels. Turn your
traction control system off; see Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 5-8. Then shift back and forth
between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the
wheels as little as possible. Release the accelerator
pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator
pedal when the transmission is in gear. By slowly
spinning your wheels in the forward and reverse
directions, you will cause a rocking motion that may free
your vehicle. If that does not get you out after a few
tries, you may need to be towed out. If you do need to
be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 5-35.
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,
cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels
on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly
carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the
Certification label.
5-30
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
Tire and Loading Information Label
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the
size of the original equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For more
information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 6-46
and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6-53.
There is also important loading information on the
vehicle Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle. See
“Certification Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX pounds” on your vehicle’s placard.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is
attached to the center pillar (B-pillar) of your vehicle. With
the driver’s door open, you will find the label attached
below the door latch. This label shows the number of
occupant seating positions (A), and the maximum vehicle
capacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
5-31
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
Your vehicle is neither designed nor intended to tow
a trailer.
Example 1
Item
A
B
C
5-32
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 150 lbs
(68 kg) x 1 =
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
Total
400 lbs (181 kg)
150 lbs (68 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
Example 2
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 2 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 150 lbs
(68 kg) x 2 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Example 3
Total
Item
400 lbs (181 kg)
A
300 lbs (136 kg)
B
100 lbs (45 kg)
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 3 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 200 lbs
(91 kg) x 2 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Total
400 lbs (181 kg)
400 lbs (181 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label
for specific information about your vehicle’s capacity
weight and seating positions. The combined weight of
the driver, passengers and cargo should never
exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.
5-33
Certification Label
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
A vehicle specific Certification label is attached to the
rear edge of the driver’s door. It tells you the gross
weight capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the
weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or
rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread it
out. Do not carry more than 100 lbs (45 kg) in the
rear area of your vehicle.
5-34
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like suitcases,
tools, packages or anything else — they will go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash, they will keep going.
Towing
{CAUTION:
Towing Your Vehicle
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the rear area of your vehicle.
Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See
Roadside Service on page 8-6.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle — such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”
(towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with any of
its wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be
towed, see “Towing Your Vehicle” earlier in this section.
Towing a Trailer
Your XLR is neither designed nor intended to tow
a trailer.
5-35
✍ NOTES
5-36
Section 6
Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................6-3
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................6-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your
Vehicle ......................................................6-5
Fuel ................................................................6-5
Gasoline Octane ............................................6-5
Gasoline Specifications ....................................6-5
California Fuel ...............................................6-5
Additives .......................................................6-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................6-6
Filling Your Tank ............................................6-7
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................6-10
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................6-10
Hood Release ..............................................6-11
Engine Compartment Overview .......................6-12
Engine Oil ...................................................6-13
Engine Oil Life System ..................................6-16
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................6-18
Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................6-20
Engine Coolant .............................................6-20
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ..................6-23
Engine Overheating .......................................6-23
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode ........................................6-25
Cooling System ............................................6-26
Power Steering Fluid .....................................6-31
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................6-32
Brakes ........................................................6-33
Battery ........................................................6-36
Jump Starting ...............................................6-37
Rear Axle .......................................................6-41
Headlamp Aiming ...........................................6-42
Headlamp Vertical Aiming ..............................6-43
Bulb Replacement ..........................................6-44
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............6-45
Tires ..............................................................6-46
Tire Sidewall Labelling ...................................6-47
Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................6-49
Run-Flat Tires ..............................................6-52
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................6-53
Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................6-55
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................6-57
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................6-58
Buying New Tires .........................................6-58
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................6-59
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................6-61
Wheel Replacement ......................................6-61
Tire Chains ..................................................6-63
Lifting Your Vehicle .......................................6-64
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................6-68
6-1
Section 6
Service and Appearance Care
Appearance Care ............................................6-70
Fabric/Carpet ...............................................6-70
Vinyl ...........................................................6-72
Leather .......................................................6-72
Instrument Panel ..........................................6-72
Interior Plastic Components ............................6-72
Wood Panels ...............................................6-72
Speaker Covers ............................................6-73
Glass Surfaces .............................................6-73
Care of Safety Belts ......................................6-73
Weatherstrips ...............................................6-73
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................6-74
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................6-74
Finish Care ..................................................6-74
Windshield and Wiper Blades .........................6-75
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ................6-76
Tires ...........................................................6-76
6-2
Sheet Metal Damage .....................................6-77
Finish Damage .............................................6-77
Underbody Maintenance ................................6-77
Chemical Paint Spotting .................................6-77
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................6-78
Vehicle Identification ......................................6-79
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................6-79
Service Parts Identification Label .....................6-79
Electrical System ............................................6-80
Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................6-80
Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................6-80
Power Windows and Other Power Options .......6-80
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................6-80
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..........................6-81
Underhood Fuse Block ..................................6-83
Capacities and Specifications ..........................6-85
Service
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
6-3
Doing Your Own Service Work
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can. To order the proper service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 8-12.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-47.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Maintenance Record on page 7-14.
6-4
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Gasoline Specifications
Fuel
It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications
which were developed by automobile manufacturers
around the world and contained in the World-Wide Fuel
Charter which is available from the Alliance of
Automobile Manufacturers at
www.autoalliance.org/fuel_charter.htm. Gasoline
meeting these specifications could provide improved
driveability and emission control system performance
compared to other gasoline.
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of your vehicle.
California Fuel
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind
noise and affect windshield washer performance. Check
with your dealer before adding equipment to the
outside of your vehicle.
Gasoline Octane
Use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of
91 or higher for best performance. You may also use
middle grade or regular unleaded gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher, but your vehicle’s acceleration may
be slightly reduced. If the octane is less than 87, you may
get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs,
use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. Otherwise, you might damage your engine.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (see the underhood emission control label), it
is designed to operate on fuels that meet California
specifications. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may
turn on and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-55. If this
occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered
by your warranty.
6-5
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work properly. In
most cases, you should not have to add anything to your
fuel. However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. General Motors
recommends that you buy gasolines that are advertised
to help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean. If your
vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors or
valves, try a different brand of gasoline. Also, your GM
dealer has additives that will help correct and prevent
most deposit-related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if
they comply with the specifications described earlier.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
6-6
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you buy
gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors
does not recommend the use of such gasolines.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs
and the performance of the emission control system
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp
may turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized
GM dealer for service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
Filling Your Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials
away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump
unattended when refueling your vehicle — this
is against the law in some places. Keep
children away from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
6-7
The fuel door release
button is located on the left
side of the instrument
panel. The button
only works when the
vehicle is in PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) and the
valet lockout button
is in OFF.
An alternate fuel door release is located inside the trunk
behind a panel on the driver’s side of the vehicle. Pull
the handle to release the fuel door.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise). The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the
cap is released too soon, it will spring back to the right.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
6-8
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly
full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open
the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise
to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See
Washing Your Vehicle on page 6-74.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions
system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-55.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully
installed. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel
cap has been left off or improperly installed. This
would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-55.
The CHECK GAS CAP message in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) will be displayed if the fuel cap
is not properly installed.
6-9
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
6-10
{CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release
To lift the hood, use the following steps:
1. Pull the lever inside the
vehicle to open the
hood. It is located on
the lower left side of the
instrument panel.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and find the
secondary hood release lever. The lever is
located under the hood near the center of the
vehicle. Move the release lever to the right and raise
the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are on
properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.
6-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood, here is what you will see:
6-12
A. Battery. See Battery on page 6-36.
B. Passenger Compartment Air Filter. See Passenger
Compartment Air Filter on page 3-45.
C. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Block
on page 6-83.
D. Power Steering Fluid. See Power Steering Fluid on
page 6-31.
E. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 6-18.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 6-13.
G. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 6-13.
H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 6-33.
I. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 6-23.
J. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 6-32.
Engine Oil
If the LOW OIL LEVEL or LOW OIL PRESSURE
message on the Driver Information Center appears, it
means you need to check your engine oil level right
away. For more information, see LOW OIL LEVEL and
LOW OIL PRESSURE under DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-64.
You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is
an added reminder.
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 6-12 for
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
6-13
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 6-12 for
the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is at or below the cross-hatched area at the tip
of the dipstick, then you will need to add at least one
quart of oil. But you must use the right kind. This section
explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil
crankcase capacity, see Capacities and Specifications
on page 6-85.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If your engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, your engine could be damaged.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for two things:
• GM4718M
Your vehicle’s engine requires a special oil meeting
GM Standard GM4718M. Oils meeting this
standard may be identified as synthetic. However,
not all synthetic oils will meet this GM standard.
You should look for and use only an oil that meets
GM Standard GM4718M.
Notice: If you use oils that do not have the
GM4718M Standard designation, you can cause
engine damage not covered by your warranty.
6-14
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
You should look for this on the oil container, and use
only those oils that are identified as meeting GM
Standard GM4718M and have the starburst symbol on
the front of the oil container.
Your vehicle’s engine is filled at the factory with a
Mobil 1® synthetic oil, which meets all requirements for
your vehicle.
6-15
Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain
engine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M
may not be available. You can add substitute oil
designated SAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbol at all
temperatures. Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard
GM4718M should not be used for an oil change.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM4718M are all you will need for good performance
and engine protection.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, you
must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
6-16
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE OIL NOW message in the DIC
will come on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 3-64. Change your oil as soon as possible within
the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if
you are driving under the best conditions, the oil
life system may not indicate that an oil change is
necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil and
filter must be changed at least once a year and at
this time the system must be reset. Your dealer has
GM-trained service people who will perform this
work using genuine GM parts and reset the system. It is
also important to check your oil regularly and keep it
at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System and the Oil Life Indicator
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Anytime your oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a
CHANGE OIL NOW message in the DIC being
turned on, reset the system.
After the oil has been changed, the CHANGE OIL NOW
message and the oil life indicator must be reset. To
reset the message use the following procedure:
1. Press the up or down arrow to scroll the DIC to
show OIL LIFE.
2. Once the XXX% ENGINE OIL LIFE menu item is
highlighted, press and hold the RESET button until
the percentage shows 100%.
If the percentage does not return to 100% or if the
CHANGE OIL NOW message comes back on
when you start your vehicle, the engine oil
life system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in
the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it
to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem
properly disposing of your used oil, ask your dealer, a
service station or a local recycling center for help.
6-17
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
To inspect or replace the filters, do the following:
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6-12 for
the location of the engine air cleaner/filters.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filters
Inspect the air cleaner/filters at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace at the first oil change after
50,000 miles (83 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 7-4 for more information. If you are driving
in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filters at each
engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filters
To inspect the air cleaner/filters, remove the filters from
the vehicle and lightly shake the filters to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filters remain caked with dirt,
new filters are required.
1. Flip the clasps on the top of the engine air
cleaner/filter cover forward to unlatch the cover.
2. Lift the front of the cover at an angle and remove.
This is necessary due to the four tabs located on
the rear of the cover.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter element and
any loose debris that may be found in the air
cleaner base.
6-18
4. Inspect or replace the filter.
5. Repeat the procedure for the second air
cleaner/filter.
Follow these steps to reinstall the covers to the engine
air cleaner/filter housings:
1. Align the four tabs located on the back of the cover
with the three slots on the back of the housing.
2. Push the cover slightly down and towards the
engine to engage the tabs in the slots and align the
two wing screws.
3. Engage and tighten the two clasps on the top of the
engine air cleaner/filter cover.
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned. The
air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to
stop flame if the engine backfires. If it is not
there and the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you
are driving.
6-19
Automatic Transmission Fluid
How to Check
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid
loss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to your dealer
service department and have it repaired as soon
as possible.
There is a special procedure for checking and changing
the transmission fluid. Because this procedure is difficult,
you should have this done at your dealer service
department. Contact your dealer for additional
information or the procedure can be found in the service
manual. To purchase a service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 8-12.
Notice: Use of automatic transmission fluid labeled
other than DEXRON®-III, Approved for the
H-Specification, may damage your vehicle, and the
damages may not be covered by your warranty.
Always use automatic transmission fluid labeled
DEXRON®-III, Approved for the H-Specification.
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(80 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one of
these conditions:
• In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
• In hilly or mountainous terrain.
• High performance operation.
If you do not use your vehicle under one of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every
100,000 miles (166 000 km).
See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7-4 for the proper
service intervals for the transmission fluid and filter.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how
to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating
on page 6-23.
6-20
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
•
•
•
•
•
Giving freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
not need to add anything else.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you do not
have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim
to improve the system. These can be harmful.
6-21
Checking Coolant
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
The engine coolant surge tank is located toward the
rear of the engine compartment on the driver’s side of
the vehicle. For more information on location, see
Engine Compartment Overview on page 6-12.
6-22
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the FULL
COLD mark, located on the side of the surge tank
that faces the front.
If the LOW COOLANT message on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) comes on and stays on, it
means you are low on engine coolant. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-64 for more
information.
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the
engine is cool.
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
{CAUTION:
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6-12 for
information on location.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Engine Overheating
When replacing the pressure cap, press down and turn
it clockwise (right) until you hear a clicking sound.
Make sure you fully install the cap.
You will find a COOLANT OVER TEMP message or an
ENGINE HOT, STOP ENGINE message displayed in the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-64. You will also hear a chime.
There is also an engine coolant temperature gage on the
instrument panel cluster. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 3-54.
6-23
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
See Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode on page 6-25 for information on driving
to a safe place in an emergency.
6-24
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you keep
driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be badly
damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode on page 6-25 for information on
driving to a safe place in an emergency.
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
An overheat warning, along with a low coolant message,
can indicate a serious problem.
If you get an engine overheat warning with no low
coolant message, but see or hear no steam, the problem
may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can
get a little too hot when you:
•
•
•
•
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
2. Set the climate controls to the highest heat setting
and fan speed and open the windows as necessary.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you
can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about
10 minutes. If the warning does not come back on, you
can drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine for three
minutes while you are parked. If you still have the
warning, turn off the engine and get everyone out of the
vehicle until it cools down. Also, see “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode” later in this section.
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
This operating mode allows your vehicle to be driven to
a safe place in an emergency situation. If an overheated
engine condition exists and the DIC message ENGINE
HOT, STOP ENGINE is displayed, an overheat
protection mode which alternates firing groups of
cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode,
you will notice a significant loss in power and engine
performance. Driving extended miles (km) in the
overheat protection mode should be avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair.
The engine oil will be severely degraded. Repair the
cause of coolant loss, change the oil and reset the oil
life system. See Engine Oil on page 6-13.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
6-25
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, do
not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan
B. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap
6-26
A low coolant level should be indicated by a LOW
COOLANT message on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). If it is, you may have a leak at the
pressure cap or in the radiator hoses, heater hoses,
radiator, water pump or somewhere else in the
cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If
you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty. See
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on
page 6-25 for information on driving to a safe place
in an emergency.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to see if the electric engine cooling fan is running. If
the engine is overheating, the fan should be running. If
it is not, your vehicle needs service.
6-27
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level is not at the FULL COLD mark
on the front of the coolant surge tank, add a 50/50
mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL®
coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling
system, including the coolant surge tank pressure
cap, is cool before you do it. See Engine Coolant on
page 6-20 for more information.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant as
follows:
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant
surge tank pressure cap — even a little — they
can come out at high speed.
CAUTION:
6-28
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Never turn the cap when the cooling system,
including the coolant surge tank pressure cap,
is hot. Wait for the cooling system and coolant
surge tank pressure cap to cool if you ever
have to turn the pressure cap.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure
cap when the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise (left).
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the cap and remove it.
6-29
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture
until the level inside the surge tank stabilizes at the
FULL COLD mark on the front of the surge tank.
6-30
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine
cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level stabilizes at the FULL COLD mark
on the coolant surge tank.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the cap is
fully installed.
If the LOW COOLANT message does not appear on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) after two minutes, the
coolant is at the proper fill level. If a LOW COOLANT
message does appear, repeat Steps 1 through 3
then reinstall the pressure cap, or see your dealer.
Power Steering Fluid
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 6-12 for
reservoir location.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If
necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up to
the mark.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7-11.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
6-31
Windshield Washer Fluid
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the
What to Use
manufacturer’s instructions for adding water.
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Adding Washer Fluid
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters full
The LOW WASHER FLUID message will be displayed
on the Driver Information Center (DIC) when the
fluid is low.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 6-12 for reservoir
location.
6-32
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of
the washer system. Also, water does not clean as
well as washer fluid.
when it is very cold. This allows for expansion if
freezing occurs, which could damage the tank if
it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 6-12 for
the location of the
reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is
that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you
should have your brake system fixed, since a leak
means that sooner or later your brakes will not work
well, or will not work at all.
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you will have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid”
in this section.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check your brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 7-4.
6-33
Checking Brake Fluid
You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.
Look at the brake fluid reservoir. The fluid level should
be above the MIN mark on the reservoir. If it is not, have
your brake system checked to see if there is a leak.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system, make
sure the level is between the MIN and MAX marks.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 7-11. Use new brake fluid from a sealed
container only.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
6-34
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system parts so
badly that they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If
you do, wash it off immediately. See Appearance
Care on page 6-70.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving, except when you are pushing on the
brake pedal firmly.
Replacing Brake System Parts
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
your brakes will not work well. That could lead
to an accident. When you hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied.
This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your
vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GM
brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system — for example, when your brake linings
wear down and you need new ones put in — be sure
you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you do
not, your brakes may no longer work properly. For
example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong
for your vehicle, the balance between your front and
rear brakes can change — for the worse. The braking
performance you have come to expect can change
in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong
replacement brake parts.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
As you make brake stops, your disc brakes
automatically adjust for wear.
6-35
Battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, get one that has the replacement
number shown on the original battery’s label. We
recommend an ACDelco® replacement battery.
For battery replacement, see your dealer or the service
manual. To purchase a service manual, see Service
and Owner Publications in Service Publications Ordering
Information on page 8-12.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands
after handling.
Vehicle Storage
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or
more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from the
battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
6-36
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
are not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 6-37 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
You must close all doors and the trunk before
reconnecting the battery. After reconnecting the battery,
you must press the unlock button on the keyless
access transmitter. Failure to follow this procedure may
result in the alarm sounding. Pressing unlock on the
keyless access transmitter would stop the alarm.
Also, for your audio system, see Theft-Deterrent Feature
on page 3-78.
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: If you try to start your vehicle by pushing
or pulling it, you could damage your vehicle. Do not
push or pull your vehicle to start it; instead, use
the jump starting procedure in this manual to start
your vehicle when the battery has run down.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This
will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And
it could save the radio!
6-37
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
each vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 6-12 for more information on location.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you. Keep
hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you do not, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
6-38
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
6-39
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the next
step. The other end of the negative (−) cable does
not go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the dead
battery.
Notice: If the jumper cables are removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting may occur and
damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Remove the jumper
cables in the correct order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other or other metal.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If
it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part
B. Good Battery
C. Dead Battery
6-40
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
How to Check Lubricant
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you will need to add some lubricant. Add enough
lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler
plug hole.
6-41
What to Use
To add lubricant when the level is low, use SAE 75W–90
Synthetic Gear Lubricant (GM Part No. 12378261) or
equivalent meeting GM Specification 9986115. To
completely refill after draining, add 4 ounces (118 ml) of
Limited-Slip Differential Lubricant Additive (GM Part
No. 1052358) or equivalent. Then fill to the bottom of the
filler plug hole with the Synthetic Gear Lubricant.
Headlamp Aiming
If your vehicle is damaged in an accident, the headlamp
aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the low beam
may be necessary if it is difficult to see lane markers (for
horizontal aim), or if oncoming drivers flash their high
beams at you (for vertical aim). If you believe your
headlamps need to be re-aimed, we recommend that
you take your vehicle to your dealer for service.
However, it is possible for you to re-aim your headlamps
as described in the following procedure.
Notice: To make sure your headlamps are aimed
properly, read all the instructions before beginning.
Failure to follow these instructions could cause
damage to headlamp parts.
The vehicle should be properly prepared as follows:
• The vehicle should be placed so the headlamps are
25 ft. (7.6 m) from a light colored wall or other flat
surface.
• The vehicle must have all four tires on a perfectly
level surface which is level all the way to the wall
or other flat surface.
• The vehicle should be placed so it is perpendicular
Your vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming system
equipped with horizontal aim indicators. The aim has
been preset at the factory and should need no further
adjustment. This is true even though your horizontal aim
indicators may not fall exactly on the “0” (zero) marks on
their scales.
6-42
to the wall or other flat surface.
• The vehicle should not have any snow, ice or mud
attached to it.
• The vehicle should be fully assembled and all other
work stopped while headlamp aiming is being done.
• The vehicle should be normally loaded with a full
tank of fuel and one person or 160 lbs (75 kg) on
the driver’s seat.
• Tires should be properly inflated.
• Start the vehicle and rock it to level the suspension.
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle low beam
lamps. The high beam lamps will be correctly aimed if
the low beam lamps are aimed properly.
The headlamp aiming
devices are under the
hood near the headlamps.
Headlamp Vertical Aiming
Notice: Horizontal aiming must be performed
before making any adjustments to the vertical aim.
Adjusting the vertical aim first will result in an
incorrect headlamp aim.
1. Find the aim dot on the lens of the low beam lamps.
2. Measure the distance from the ground to the aim
dot on each low beam lamp. Record this distance.
3. At the wall or other flat surface, measure from the
ground upward the recorded distance from Step 2
and draw or tape a horizontal line the width of
the vehicle.
If you believe your headlamps need vertical (up/down)
adjustment, follow the vertical aiming procedure.
Adjustment screws can be turned with an E8 Torx
socket or T15 Torx screwdriver.
®
6-43
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam
cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up which may cause
damage to the headlamp.
4. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a
piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the
headlamp not being aimed. This should allow only
the beam of light from the headlamp being
aimed to be seen on the flat surface.
5. Turn the vertical
aiming screw until the
headlamp beam is
aimed to the horizontal
tape line. The top
edge of the cut-off
should be positioned at
the bottom edge of
the horizontal tape line.
6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for the opposite headlamp.
Bulb Replacement
It is recommended that all bulbs be replaced by
your dealer.
6-44
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear or cracking. See “Wiper Blade
Check” under Scheduled Maintenance on page 7-4.
It is a good idea to clean or replace the wiper blade
assembly on a regular basis or when worn. For proper
windshield wiper blade length and type, see Normal
Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 7-13.
To replace the wiper blade assembly, do the following:
1. Place the vehicle in accessory mode and turn
the wipers on. Position the wipers on the
windshield in the mid-wipe position. Then with a
door open, turn the vehicle off.
2. Tip the blade up and push down on the tab to
release the wiper blade assembly.
3. To install, align the wiper blade with the loop on
the wiper blade assembly, and push up to snap it
into place.
6-45
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet
included with your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual.
6-46
{CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 5-30.
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6-53.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your
tread is badly worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
Tire Sidewall Labelling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its sidewall.
The example below shows a typical passenger (p-metric)
tire sidewall.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and
plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of letters
and numbers used to define a particular tire’s width,
height, aspect ratio, construction type and service
description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three
performance factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance. For more information see
Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 6-59.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load.
6-47
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a typical
passenger (p-metric) vehicle tire size.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates the
tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if
the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as shown in item C of
the illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is
60 percent as high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter
R means radial ply construction; the letter D means
diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter B means
belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the
first character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U. S.
Tire and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
6-48
(F) Service Description: These characters represent
the load range and speed rating of the tire. The load
index represents the load carry capacity a tire is certified
to carry. The load index can range from 1 to 279. The
speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified
to carry a load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kiloPascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to
its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6-53.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation (DOT) motor vehicle
safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire
Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator
which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production
plant, brand and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see Loading
Your Vehicle on page 5-30.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
axle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 5-30.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 5-30.
6-49
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
KiloPascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279
that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb
weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg).
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 5-30.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
6-50
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire
that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or
bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding
that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on
the other sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 6-53 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 5-30.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a tire
when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains. See
When It Is Time for New Tires on page 6-58.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus
the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 5-30.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight and
the original equipment tire size and recommended
inflation pressure. See “Tire and Loading Information
Label” under Loading Your Vehicle on page 5-30.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards):
A tire information system that provides consumers
with ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and
treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on page 6-59.
6-51
Run-Flat Tires
Your vehicle, when new, had run-flat tires. There’s no
spare tire, no tire changing equipment and no place to
store a tire in the vehicle. Run-flat tires perform so well
without any air that a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) is
used to alert you if a tire has lost pressure.
If a tire goes flat, you won’t need to stop on the side of
the road to change the tire. You can just keep on
driving. The shorter the distance you drive and the
slower the speed, the greater the chance that the tire will
not have to be replaced. If you drive on a deflated
run-flat tire for 50 miles (80 km) or less and at speeds of
55 mph (90 km/h) or less, there is a good chance that
the tire can be repaired. The tire can operate effectively
with no air pressure for up to 125 miles (201 km) at
speeds up to 55 mph (90 km/h), but the tire would then
have to be replaced. When a tire is filled with air, it
provides a cushion between the road and the wheel.
Because you won’t have this cushion when driving on a
deflated tire, try to avoid potholes that could damage
your wheel and require replacement of it.
6-52
Some road hazards can damage a tire beyond repair.
This damage could occur even before you’ve driven
on the tire in a deflated condition. When a tire has been
damaged, or if you’ve driven any distance on a
run-flat tire, check with an authorized run-flat tire service
center to determine whether the tire can be repaired
or should be replaced. To maintain your vehicle’s run-flat
feature, all replacement tires must be self-supporting
tires. As soon as possible, contact the nearest
authorized GM or run-flat servicing facility for inspection
and repair or replacement. To locate the nearest GM
or run-flat servicing facility, call Roadside Assistance.
For phone numbers and Roadside Service details
see Roadside Service on page 8-6.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
{CAUTION:
Run-flat tires are constructed differently than
other tires and could explode during improper
service. You or others could be injured or
killed if you attempt to repair, replace,
dismount, or mount a run-flat tire. Let only an
authorized run-flat service center repair,
replace, dismount and mount run-flat tires.
The valve stems on your run-flat tires have sensors that
are part of the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6-55. These
sensors contain batteries which are designed to last
for 10 years under normal driving conditions. See your
dealer if you ever need to have a wheel replaced,
or if the sensors ever need replacement.
Notice: Using liquid sealants can damage the tire
valves and tire pressure monitor sensors in your
run-flat tires. This damage would not be covered
by warranty. Don’t use liquid sealants in your
run-flat tires.
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate
effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not.
If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation),
you can get the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Too much flexing
Too much heat
Tire overloading
Premature or irregular wear
Poor handling
Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation), you
can get the following:
•
•
•
•
Unusual wear
Poor handling
Rough ride
Needless damage from road hazards
6-53
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the
center pillar, below the driver’s door latch. This label
shows your vehicle’s original equipment tires and
the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation pressure,
shown on the label, is the minimum amount of air
pressure needed to support your vehicle’s maximum
load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much weight
your vehicle can carry, and an example of the tire
and loading information label, see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 5-30. How you load your vehicle affects
vehicle handling and ride comfort, never load your
vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly
inflated even when they are underinflated. Check the
tire’s inflation pressure when the tires are cold. Cold
means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three
hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
6-54
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches
the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading
Information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If
the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach
the recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.
Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
Your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) that
sends tire pressure information to the Driver Information
Center (DIC). Using the DIC control buttons, the
driver is able to check tire pressure levels in all four
road tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor System on
page 6-55 and DIC Controls and Displays on page 3-61
for additional information.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) System on your vehicle,
uses radio and sensor technology to check tire pressure
levels. Sensors, mounted on each tire and wheel
assembly transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle. The TPM sensors transmit tire
pressure readings once every 60 seconds while the
vehicle is being driven and once every 60 minutes when
the vehicle is stationary for more than 15 minutes. Using
the Driver Information Center (DIC), tire pressure levels
can be viewed by the driver. The TPM system also uses
the DIC to warn the driver when air pressure, in one or
more tires, falls below 25 psi (172 kPa) or is above
42 psi (290 kPa). For additional information and details
about the DIC operation and displays see DIC Controls
and Displays on page 3-61 and DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-64.
A low tire warning light also appears on the instrument
panel cluster when a low tire condition exists. The
DIC message, CHECK TIRE PRESSURE and the low
tire pressure warning light will be shown each time
the engine is started and stay on until the low tire
condition is corrected.
When the tire pressure
monitoring system warning
light is lit, one or more
of your tires is significantly
under-inflated.
You should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure as
indicated on the vehicle’s tire information placard.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Each
tire, including the spare, should be checked monthly
when cold and set to the recommended inflation pressure
as specified in the vehicle placard and owner’s manual.
The Tire and Loading Information Label (tire information
placard) is on the rear edge of the driver’s door, below the
door latch. This label shows the size of your vehicle’s
original tires and the correct inflation pressure for your
vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 5-30.
Your vehicle’s TPM system can alert you about a low or
high tire pressure condition but it does not replace
normal tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 6-57
6-55
Each TPM sensor has a unique identification code that
is matched to one of the four tire positions on your
vehicle. The tire and wheel assembly positions are, left
front (LF); right front (RF); right rear (RR) and left
rear (LR). Any time you rotate your vehicle’s tires or
replace one or more TPM sensors, the identification
codes will need to be matched to the new tire and wheel
position. The TPM matching process is performed in
a specific sequence and time limit. A special tool is also
required. See your dealer for service.
The TPM system operates on a radio frequency subject
to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules
and with Industry and Science Canada.
The SVC TIRE MONITOR message is displayed when
the TPM system is malfunctioning. For example,
one or more TPM sensors may be inoperable or
missing. See your dealer for service.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
6-56
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Your vehicle’s tires should be inspected regularly for
wear. Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires
as soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
for New Tires on page 6-58 and Wheel Replacement on
page 6-61 for additional information.
Vehicles equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
system will need to have the sensors reset after a tire
rotation is performed. A special tool is needed to
reset the sensor identification codes. See your dealer
for service. Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See Wheel Replacement on page 6-61 and
“Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities and Specifications
on page 6-85.
{CAUTION:
When rotating your vehicle’s tires, always use the
correct rotation pattern shown here.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the tire and loading
information label, see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 6-53 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 5-30.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause a crash. When you change
a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places
where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an
emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper
towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper
or wire brush later, if you need to, to get all the
rust or dirt off.
6-57
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
6-58
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at
the Tire and Loading Information label. For information
about this label and where to find it, see Loading
Your Vehicle on page 5-30.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had a
Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
GM recommends that you get tires with that same TPC
Spec number. That way your vehicle will continue to have
tires that are designed to give proper endurance,
handling, speed rating, load range, traction, ride, tire
pressure monitoring system performance and other
things during normal service on your vehicle. If your tires
have an all-season tread design, the TPC number will be
followed by an “MS” (for mud and snow).
Whenever you replace your tires with those not having
a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same
size, load range, speed rating and construction
type (bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
If you replace your vehicle’s tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, the tire pressure monitoring
system may give an inaccurate low-pressure warning.
Non-TPC Spec tires may give a low-pressure warning
that is higher or lower than the proper warning level you
would get with TPC Spec numbered tires.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle.
Be sure to use the same size and type tires on
all wheels.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This
applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
6-59
Treadwear
Temperature – A, B, C
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
6-60
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
If you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one
way or the other, the alignment may need to be reset. If
you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a
smooth road, your wheels may need to be rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance and tire clearance to the
body and chassis.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.
6-61
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause a crash. When you change
a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places
where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an
emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper
towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper
or wire brush later, if you need to, to get all the
rust or dirt off.
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become
loose and even come off. This could lead to a
crash. Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. If
you have to replace them, be sure to get new
GM original equipment wheel nuts.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or the
threads of the wheel nuts. If you do, the wheel
nuts might come loose and the wheel could
fall off, causing a crash.
6-62
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification.
Used Replacement Wheels
Tire Chains
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used
or how far it’s been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle
without the proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes, suspension or
other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the
tire chains could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle and you or others may be injured
in a crash. Use another type of traction device
only if its manufacturer recommends it for use
on your vehicle and tire size combination and
road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, re-adjust or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do
not spin your wheels. If you do find traction
devices that will fit, install them on the
rear tires.
6-63
Lifting Your Vehicle
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle can cause an injury. The
vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured. Find a level place to lift your vehicle.
To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic transmission shift lever
in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine.
To be even more certain the vehicle won’t
move, you can put blocks in front of and
behind the wheels.
6-64
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to place
the jack in the proper location before raising
the vehicle.
If you ever use a jack to lift your vehicle, follow the
instructions that came with the jack, and be sure to use
the correct lifting points to avoid damaging your vehicle.
Lifting From the Front
Notice: Lifting your vehicle improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs not
covered by your warranty. To lift your vehicle
properly, follow the advice in this part.
To help prevent vehicle damage:
• Be sure to place a block or pad between the
jack and the vehicle.
• Make sure the jack you’re using spans at least
two crossmember ribs.
• Lift only in the areas shown in the following
pictures.
For additional information, see your dealer and the
Cadillac XLR service manual.
The front lifting points can be accessed from either side
of your vehicle, behind the front tires.
6-65
1. Locate the front lifting points (A), according to the
illustration shown.
2. Be sure to place a block or pad between the jack
and the vehicle.
6-66
3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making sure the jack
spans at least two of the crossmember ribs (B).
Lifting From the Rear
1. Locate the rear lifting points (A), according to the
illustration shown.
The rear lifting points can be accessed from the rear of
the vehicle, on either the driver’s or passenger’s side.
2. Be sure to place a block or pad between the jack
and the vehicle.
6-67
If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly. See
Tires on page 6-46 for additional information.
Your vehicle, when new, had run-flat tires. This type of
tire can operate effectively with no air pressure, so
you won’t need to stop on the side of the road to change
a flat tire. You can just keep on driving. The shorter
the distance you drive and the slower the speed,
the greater the chance that the run-flat tire will not have
to be replaced. Run-flat tires perform so well without
any air that a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) is used
to alert you if a tire has lost pressure. See Run-Flat Tires
on page 6-52 and Tire Pressure Monitor System on
page 6-55.
3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making sure the jack
spans at least two of the crossmember ribs (B).
For more information, see Doing Your Own Service
Work on page 6-4.
6-68
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
When the TIRE FLAT MAX SPD 55, REDUCED
HNDLG message is displayed on the Driver
Information Center, your vehicle’s handling
capabilities will be reduced during severe
maneuvers. If you drive too fast, you could
lose control of your vehicle. You or others
could be injured. Don’t drive over 55 mph
(90 km/h) when the TIRE FLAT MAX SPD 55,
REDUCED HNDLG message is displayed. Drive
cautiously and check your tire pressures as
soon as you can.
Special tools and procedures are required to
service a run-flat tire. If these special tools and
procedures aren’t used you or others could be
injured and your vehicle could be damaged.
Always be sure the proper tools and
procedures, as described in the service
manual, are used.
If the TPM system detects a tire pressure below
5 psi (34 kPa), the TIRE FLAT MAX SPD 55, REDUCED
HNDLG warning message is displayed on the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Controls and
Displays on page 3-61 and DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-64 for information and details about the
DIC operation and displays.
Notice: Using liquid sealants can damage the tire
valves and tire pressure monitor sensors in your
run-flat tires. This damage would not be covered
by warranty. Don’t use liquid sealants in your
run-flat tires.
To order a service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 8-12.
If a tire goes flat, the stability control system will turn on
automatically even if it was disabled by the driver.
When a flat tire condition exists the StabiliTrak® system
cannot be turned off. See StabiliTrak® System on
page 5-10.
6-69
Appearance Care
Cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic.
Other cleaning products can burst into flames if a match
is struck near them or if they get on a hot part of the
vehicle. Some are dangerous if their fumes are inhaled
in an enclosed space. When anything from a container
is used to clean the vehicle, be sure to follow the
manufacturer’s warnings and instructions. Always open
the doors or windows of the vehicle when cleaning
the inside.
Never use these to clean the vehicle:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Gasoline
Benzene
Naphtha
Carbon Tetrachloride
Acetone
Paint Thinner
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
Do not use any of these products unless this manual
says you can. In many uses, these will damage
the vehicle:
• Alcohol
• Laundry Soap
• Bleach
• Reducing Agents
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic, and painted surfaces
with a clean, damp cloth.
GM-approved cleaning products can be obtained from
your dealer.
Here are some cleaning tips:
• Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
• Clean up stains as soon as you can before they set.
• Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
• Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean
Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous — some more than
others — and they can all damage the vehicle, too.
6-70
•
area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are
stubborn.
To avoid forming a ring on fabric after spot cleaning,
clean the entire area immediately or it will set.
Most stains can be removed with club soda water. To
clean, use the following instructions:
1. For liquids: blot with a clean, soft, white cloth. For
solids: remove as much as possible and then
vacuum or brush.
2. Apply club soda water to a clean, soft, white cloth. Do
not over-saturate; the cloth should not drip water.
3. Clean the entire area. Avoid getting the fabric
too wet.
4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain to
avoid a ring effect.
5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth
each time it becomes soiled.
6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned area
with another dry, clean, soft, white cloth.
7. If the cleaner leaves a ring effect, follow up with
the club soda water instructions given earlier in
this section.
4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain to
avoid a ring effect.
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth
each time it becomes soiled.
Stains caused by such things as catsup, black coffee,
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine, and
blood can be removed using the club soda water
instructions given earlier in this section. If an odor lingers
after cleaning vomit or urine, treat the area with a water
and baking soda solution: 1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking
soda to 1 cup (250 ml) of lukewarm water. Let dry.
6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned area
with another dry, clean, soft, white cloth.
Using Cleaner on Fabric
1. First, try the cleaner on an area of the fabric that is
not easily seen to make sure the cleaner does not
affect the color of the fabric.
2. For liquids: blot with a clean, soft, white cloth. For
solids: remove as much as possible and then
vacuum or brush.
3. Spray a small amount of the cleaner onto a clean
soft, white, cloth. Do not apply spray directly to
the fabric.
Stains caused by oil and grease can be cleaned with an
approved GM cleaner and a clean, white cloth.
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely.
3. If a stain remains, follow the “Using Cleaner on
Fabric” instructions described earlier.
6-71
Vinyl
Instrument Panel
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones
or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult to see through the
windshield under certain conditions.
• Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. This
may have to be done more than once.
• Things like tar, asphalt, and shoe polish will stain if
they are not removed quickly. Use a clean cloth
and vinyl cleaner. See your dealer for this product.
Leather
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let
the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
• For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner.
• Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish, or shoe polish on leather.
• Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish,
it can harm the leather.
6-72
Interior Plastic Components
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth
or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
Wood Panels
Use a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water (use
mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood immediately
with a clean cloth.
Speaker Covers
Care of Safety Belts
Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that the
speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots with
just water and mild soap.
Keep belts clean and dry.
Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a
liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. See
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 6-78.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger and the integrated radio antenna. When
cleaning the glass on your vehicle, use only a soft
cloth and glass cleaner.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7-11.
6-73
Washing Your Vehicle
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty, depth of
color, gloss retention, and durability.
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle
on page 6-74.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. GM-approved
cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer. See
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 6-78. Do
not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the
surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,
clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
the vehicle.
6-74
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint
finish. GM-approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 6-78.
The vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. The
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather,
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. To help keep the paint finish looking new, keep
the vehicle in a garage or covered whenever possible.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap, or other material may be on the blade
or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a glass
cleaning liquid or powder and water solution. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when it is rinsed
with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
6-75
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
The vehicle may be equipped with either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only GM-approved cleaners on
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because you could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
6-76
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
Sheet Metal Damage
Underbody Maintenance
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials avaliable from your dealer or other service
outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in your dealer’s body and paint shop.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your GM dealer or an underbody car washing system
can do this for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and
small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
6-77
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
See your GM dealer for more information on purchasing
the following products.
Description
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Vinyl Cleaner
Cleans vinyl tops,
upholstery, and
convertible tops.
Glass Cleaner
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Chrome and Wire Wheel
Cleaner
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Finish Enhancer
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.
Usage
Swirl Remover Polish
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Cleaner Wax
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Foaming Tire Shine Low
Gloss
Cleans, shines, and
protects in one step. No
wiping necessary.
Wash Wax Concentrate
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Spot Lifter
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
vinyl, and cloth
upholstery.
Odor Eliminator
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
Usage
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
6-78
Description
See your General Motors parts department for these
products. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 7-11.
Vehicle Identification
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
The eighth character in your VIN is the engine code.
This code will help you identify your engine,
specifications and replacement parts.
Service Parts Identification Label
You will find this label on your spare tire cover. It is very
helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label,
you will find the following:
•
•
•
•
VIN
Model designation
Paint information
Production options and special equipment
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
6-79
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and
the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other
components from working as they should.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-47.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker. If the wiper motor overheats due to
heavy snow, the wipers will stop until the motor cools
and will then restart.
A fuse powers the wiper motor. If the fuse blows, there
is an electrical problem. Be sure to have it fixed.
6-80
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and power
seats. When the current load is too heavy, the circuit
breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the
problem is fixed or goes away.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires
caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating. If a fuse should blow, see your dealer
for service immediately.
If you ever have a problem on the road and do not have
a spare fuse, you can “borrow” one that has the same
amperage. Pick some feature of your vehicle that
you can get along without – like the radio or cigarette
lighter – and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The panel fuse block is located on the passenger’s side
of the vehicle, under the instrument panel and under
the toe-board.
Remove the carpet and toe-board covering to access
the fuse block by pulling at the top of each corner of the
panel. Then turn the fuse block door knob
counterclockwise and pull the door to access the fuses.
Fuses
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Usage
Spare Fuse
Spare Fuse
Spare Fuse
Spare Fuse
Fuse Pull
Reverse Lamp
Starter/Crank
Parking Brake Solenoid A
Reverse Lamps
BTSI Solenoid, Column Lock
Not Used
Not Used
GMLAN Devices
Rear Park Aid, Heated/Cooled
Seats, Windshield Wiper Relays
Door Locks
Engine Control Module
Interior Lights
Airbags, Passenger Airbag Off
Switch
Not Used
OnStar®
6-81
Fuses
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
6-82
Usage
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC),
Driver Door Switch
Power Tilt Wheel, Telescopic
Steering Column, Memory Seat,
Driver Seat Switch, Retractable
Hardtop Switch
Ignition Switch, Intrusion Sensor
Stop Lamp
Inside Rearview Mirror, Climate
Control System, Column Lock,
Power Sounder
Instrument Panel Cluster, Head-Up
Display (HUD)
Radio, S-Band, CD Changer
Tap-Up/Tap-Down Switch
Climate Control System, Power
Sounder
Rear Fog Lamps, Diagnostic Link
Connector
Power Folding Mirror
Trunk Close Button, Parking Brake
Solenoid B
Power Seats
Fuses
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
Usage
Door Controls
Run, Accessory Power
Not Used
Not Used
Rainsense™
Steering Wheel Control Button
Lights
Power Lumbar
Passenger’s Side Heated Seat
Driver’s Side Heated Seat
Not Used
Retractable Hardtop, Trunk Latch
Auxiliary Power
Cigar Lighter
Park Brake Hold
Park Brake Release
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Fuel Door
Underhood Fuse Block
The underhood fuse block
is located next to the
engine on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle. For
more information on
location, see Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 6-12.
Fuses
To access the fuses, push in the tab located at the end
of the fuse block cover. Then lift the cover open.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Usage
Anti-Lock Brake System, Magnetic
Ride Control
Horn
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC),
Transmission Controls
Windshield Wipers
Stop/Back-Up Lamps
Oxygen Sensor
Battery 5
Parking Lamps
Electronic Throttle Control
6-83
Fuses
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
6-84
Usage
Fuel Pump
Engine Control Module,
Transmission Control Module
Odd Injectors
Magnetic Ride Control
Emission Controls
Air Conditioning Compressor
Even Injectors
Windshield Washer
Headlamp Washer
Right Low Beam Headlamp
Left Low Beam Headlamp
Fog Lamp
Right High Beam Headlamp
Left High Beam Headlamp
Not Used
Battery 3
Anti-Lock Brakes
Climate Controls
Battery 2
Starter
Audio Amplifier
Cooling Fan
Battery 1
Fuses
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Not Used
Fuse Puller
Usage
Relays
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
Usage
Horn
Air Conditioning Compressor
Windshield Washer
Parking Lamps
Fog Lamps
High Beam Headlamps
Rear Window Defogger
Windshield Wiper High/Low
Wiper RUN/ACCESSORY Power
Starter/Crank
Ignition 1
Windshield Wiper On/Off
Headlamp Washer
Low Beam Headlamps
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer to Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 7-11 for more information.
Capacities
English
Metric
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
1.4 lbs
0.64 kg
Cooling System
14.8 quarts
14.0 L
Engine Oil with Filter
8.0 quarts
7.6 L
Fuel Tank
18.0 gallons
68.0 L
Automatic Transmission
9.5 quarts
8.5 L
Wheel Nut Torque
100 ft lb
140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Application
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
4.6L PV8
A
Automatic
0.040 inches (1.02 mm)
6-85
✍ NOTES
6-86
Section 7
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................7-2
Introduction ...................................................7-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................7-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................7-2
Using Your Maintenance Schedule ....................7-2
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................7-4
Additional Required Services ............................7-6
Maintenance Footnotes ...................................7-7
Owner Checks and Services ............................7-8
At Each Fuel Fill ............................................7-8
At Least Once a Month ...................................7-8
At Least Once a Year .....................................7-9
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............7-11
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........7-13
Maintenance Record .....................................7-14
7-1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of
emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Requirements
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we do not know
exactly how you will drive it. You may drive very
short distances only a few times a week. Or you may
drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty
weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many
other ways.
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary
to keep your vehicle in good working condition. Any
damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance may not be covered by warranty.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your GM Goodwrench dealer.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
7-2
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the tire and
loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 5-30.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 6-5.
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 7-4
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Required Services on page 7-6 and Maintenance
Footnotes on page 7-7 for further information.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your GM Goodwrench dealer to have a
qualified technician do the work.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, you should have your GM
Goodwrench dealer do these jobs.
When you go to your GM Goodwrench dealer for your
service needs, you will know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will perform the work
using genuine GM parts.
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 8-12.
Owner Checks and Services on page 7-8 tells you what
should be checked, when to check it and what you can
easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 7-11 and Normal Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 7-13. When your vehicle is serviced,
make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced
and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine GM parts.
7-3
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE OIL NOW message in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) comes on, it means that service
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as
soon as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It
is possible that, if you are driving under the best
conditions, the engine oil life system may not indicate that
vehicle service is necessary for over a year. However,
your engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a
year and at this time the system must be reset. Your GM
Goodwrench dealer has GM-trained service technicians
who will perform this work using genuine GM parts and
reset the system.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally, you
must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles (5 000 km)
since your last service. Remember to reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life
System on page 6-16 for information on the Engine Oil
Life System and resetting the system.
7-4
When the CHANGE OIL NOW message appears,
certain services, checks and inspections are required.
Required services are described in the following for
“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally,
it is recommended that your first service be
Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II
and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II
may be required more often.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE
OIL NOW message comes on within 10 months since the
vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the message comes on
10 months or more since the last service or if the
message has not come on at all for one year.
Scheduled Maintenance
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 6-13. Reset oil life
system. See Engine Oil Life System on page 6-16. An Emission Control
Service.
Service
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (a).
•
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 6-18. An Emission Control Service. See footnotes †
and (h).
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
needed.
•
•
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
this section.
•
•
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (b).
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (c).
•
Lubricate body components. See footnote (d).
•
Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (e).
•
7-5
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated
miles (kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
Inspect fuel system for damage
or leaks.
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 6-18.
An Emission Control Service.
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (severe service).
See footnote (f).
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (normal service).
Replace spark plugs. An Emission
Control Service.
Engine cooling system service (or
every 5 years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. See
footnote (g).
Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An
Emission Control Service.
7-6
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
(83 000)
•
75,000
(125 000)
100,000
(166 000)
•
125,000
(207 500)
150,000
(240 000)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Maintenance Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
(a) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired
and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(b) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.
Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged
or that streak or miss areas of the windshield.
(c) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced. Also look for any opened or broken airbag
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced.
(The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.)
(d) Lubricate the trunk key lock cylinder. Lubricate all
body door hinges. Lubricate all hinges and latches,
including those for the hood, trunk, console door and
any folding seat hardware. More frequent lubrication
may be required when exposed to a corrosive
environment. Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips
with a clean cloth will make them last longer, seal
better and not stick or squeak.
(e) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, the
filter may require replacement more often.
(f) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− Uses such as high performance operation.
(g) Drain, flush and refill cooling system. See Engine
Coolant on page 6-20 for what to use. Inspect hoses.
Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and filler neck.
Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap.
(h) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
7-7
Owner Checks and Services
Engine Coolant Level Check
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your GM Goodwrench dealer can assist you
with these checks and services.
Check the engine coolant level and add
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine
Coolant on page 6-20 for further details.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7-11.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 6-13 for further
details.
Notice: It is important to check your oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep your
engine oil at the proper level can cause damage
to your engine not covered by your warranty.
7-8
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inspection and Inflation Check
Visually inspect your tires for wear and make sure tires
are inflated to the correct pressures. See Tires on
page 6-46 for further details.
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
Transmission Shift Lock Control
System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-28 if necessary.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-28 if necessary.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter
should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the starter works in any other position, contact
your GM Goodwrench dealer for service.
3. With the engine off and without applying the regular
brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)
with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out
of PARK (P), contact your GM Goodwrench dealer
for service.
7-9
Parking Brake and Transmission Park (P)
Mechanism Check
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill.
Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With the
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
engine running and transmission in NEUTRAL (N),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking
brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service
is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
7-10
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number or specification may be obtained from
your dealer.
Usage
Engine Oil
Fluid/Lubricant
The engine requires a special
engine oil meeting GM Standard
GM4718M. Oils meeting this
standard may be identified as
synthetic, and should also be
identified with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified for
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol.
However, not all synthetic API oils
with the starburst symbol will meet
this GM standard. You should look
for and use only an oil that meets
GM Standard GM4718M. GM
Goodwrench oil meets all the
requirements for your vehicle. For
the proper viscosity, see Engine Oil
on page 6-13.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
only
Engine Coolant water and use
DEX-COOL® Coolant. See Engine
Coolant on page 6-20.
Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Washer Solvent
Power Steering Fluid (GM Part
Power Steering GM
No.
U.S.
89021184, in Canada
System
89021186).
Automatic
Transmission
DEXRON®-III Automatic
Transmission Fluid. Look for
“Approved for the H-Specification”
on the label.
Lubricant, Superlube
Trunk Key Lock Multi-Purpose
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Cylinder
Canada 10953474).
7-11
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Rear Axle
(Limited-Slip
Differential)
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle
Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S.
12378261, in Canada 10953455)
meeting GM Specification 9986115.
With a complete drain and refill add
4 ounces (118 ml) of Limited-Slip
Axle Lubricant Additive (GM Part
No. U.S. 1052358, in Canada
992694) where required. See Rear
Axle on page 6-41.
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch, Pivots,
Spring Anchor
and Release
Pawl
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM
Part No. U.S. 12346293, in Canada
992723) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI #2, Category
LB or GC-LB.
7-12
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Lubricant, Superlube
Hood and Door Multi-Purpose
(GM
Part
No.
U.S.
12346241, in
Hinges
Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part
No. U.S. 12345579, in Canada
992887).
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
GM Part Number
ACDelco® Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Elements
10318557
A2061C
Engine Oil Filter
89017342
PF61
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element
10345066
—
Spark Plugs
12571535
41–986
Wiper Blade (Shepherd’s Hook Type)
500 mm
12367281
—
Part
7-13
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 7-2 in this section.
Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 7-8 can be added on the following record pages.
Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
7-14
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
7-15
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
7-16
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Section 8
Customer Assistance and Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............8-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................8-2
Online Owner Center ......................................8-3
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY)
Users ........................................................8-4
Customer Assistance Offices ............................8-4
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................8-5
Roadside Service ...........................................8-6
Courtesy Transportation ...................................8-7
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders ..................................................8-9
Reporting Safety Defects ................................8-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government ..............................................8-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ..............................................8-11
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors .........................................8-11
Service Publications Ordering Information .........8-12
8-1
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Cadillac. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Cadillac Customer Assistance Center, 24 hours
a day, by calling 1-800-458-8006. In Canada, contact
the Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre
by calling 1-888-446–2000.
8-2
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title, or the
plate at the top left of the instrument panel and
visible through the windshield.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Cadillac, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That
is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
Online Owner Center
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual (United States only).
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members (United States only).
Refer to the web for updated information.
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
8-3
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Cadillac has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with
Cadillac by dialing: 1-800-833-CMCC (2622). (TTY users
in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
Cadillac encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to
write to Cadillac, the letter should be addressed
to Cadillac’s Customer Assistance Center.
United States— Customer Assistance
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
1-800-458-8006
1-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre,
163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-888-446-2000
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
8-4
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) — Customer Assistance
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 toward eligible aftermarket
driver’s or passenger’s adaptive equipment you may
require for your vehicle, such as hand controls and
wheelchair/scooter lifts.
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
The offer is available for a limited period of time from the
date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more details, or to
determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit gmmobility.com
or call the GM Mobility Assistance Center at
1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users, call
1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users call
1-800-263-3830.
8-5
Roadside Service
Cadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service is more than an
auto club or towing service. It provides every Cadillac
owner with the advantage of contacting a Cadillac
advisor and, where available, a Cadillac trained dealer
technician who can provide on-site service.
Each technician travels with a specially equipped
service vehicle complete with the necessary Cadillac
parts and tools required to handle most roadside repairs.
Cadillac Roadside Service® can be reached by dialing
1-800-882-1112, 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. This
service is provided at no charge for any warranty-covered
situation and for a nominal charge if the Cadillac is no
longer under warranty. Roadside Service is available only
in the United States and Canada.
Cadillac Owner Privileges™
Roadside Service provides several Cadillac Owner
Privileges™ at “no charge,” throughout your Cadillac
Warranty Period — 48 months/50,000 miles (80 000 km).
Emergency Road Service is performed on site for the
following situations:
• Towing Service
• Battery Jump Starting
• Lock Out Assistance
• Fuel Delivery
8-6
• Flat Tire Change (Covers change only)
• Trip Interruption — If your trip is interrupted due to
a warranty failure, incidental expenses may be
reimbursed during the 48 months/50,000 miles
(80 000 km) warranty period. Items covered
are hotel, meals, and rental car.
Roadside Service Availability
Wherever you drive in the United States or Canada, an
advisor is available to assist you over the phone. A dealer
technician, if available, can travel to your location within a
30 mile (50 km) radius of a participating Cadillac
dealership. If beyond this radius, we will arrange to have
your car towed to the nearest Cadillac dealership.
Reaching Roadside Service
Dial the toll-free Roadside Service number:
1-800-882-1112. A Roadside Service Advisor will assist
you and request the following information:
• A description of the problem
• Name, home address, home telephone number
• Location of your Cadillac and number you are
calling from
• The model year, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),
mileage, and date of delivery
Roadside Service for the Hearing or
Speech Impaired
Roadside Service is prepared to assist owners who have
hearing difficulties or are speech impaired. Cadillac has
installed special telecommunication devices called Text
Telephone (TTY) in the Roadside Service Center.
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you should
contact your dealer and request an appointment. By
scheduling a service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
Any customer who has access to a (TTY) or a
conventional teletypewriter can communicate with
Cadillac by dialing from the United States or Canada
1-888-889-2438 — daily, 24 hours.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let
them know this, and ask for instructions.
Courtesy Transportation
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for same day repair.
Cadillac has always exemplified quality and value in its
offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your ownership
experience, we and our participating dealers are
proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer
support program for new vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail
purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the
Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation options
are available when warranty repairs are required. This will
reduce your inconvenience during warranty repairs.
8-7
Transportation Options
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait Cadillac
helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Your GM dealer may arrange to provide you with a
courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental
vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for
a warranty repair. Reimbursement will be limited to a
maximum of $40 a day and must be supported by
receipts. This requires that you sign and complete a
rental agreement and meet state, local and rental
vehicle provider requirements. Requirements vary and
may include minimum age requirements, insurance
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel
usage charges and may also be responsible for
taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental
usage beyond the completion of the repair.
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a one
way or round trip shuttle service to a destination up
to 10 miles from the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement of up to a five-day maximum may be
available for the use of public transportation such as a
taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses of up to a five-day maximum
may be available. Claim amounts should reflect actual
costs and be supported by original receipts.
Additional Program Information
8-8
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is
not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A
separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a
number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor
and control several aspects of the vehicle’s performance.
Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to monitor
emission control components to optimize fuel economy,
to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and, if so
equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to help the
driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations.
Some information may be stored during regular
operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;
other information is stored only in a crash event by
computer systems, such as those commonly called event
data recorders (EDR).
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the Airbag
Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in your vehicle
may record information about the condition of the vehicle
and how it was operated, such as data related to
engine speed, brake application, throttle position, vehicle
speed, safety belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag
performance, and the severity of a collision. If your
vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®, steering
performance, including yaw rate, steering wheel angle,
and lateral acceleration, is also recorded.
8-9
This information has been used to improve vehicle
crash performance and may be used to improve crash
performance of future vehicles and driving safety.
Unlike the data recorders on many airplanes, these
on-board systems do not record sounds, such as
conversation of vehicle occupants.
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may:
To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the device that stores
the data is required. GM will not access information
about a crash event or share it with others other than:
• share summary data which is not tied to a specific
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or
• as required by law.
8-10
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where appropriate
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
the special equipment that can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or the device
that stores the data.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, please check
the OnStar® subscription service agreement or
manual for information on its operations and data
collection.
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you will notify
us. Please call us at 1-800-458-8006, or write:
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
In Canada, please call us at 1– 888– 446–2000. Or, write:
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre,
163-005
General Motors of Canada Limited
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
8-11
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments, and specifications for GM
transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
8-12
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).
Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
8-13
✍ NOTES
8-14
A
Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-38
Adaptive Cruise Control ................................... 3-16
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 6-6
Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 6-80
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 6-18
Air Conditioning .............................................. 3-40
Airbag
Off Light ..................................................... 3-50
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-49
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) ...... 8-9
Airbag System ................................................ 1-36
Airbag Off Switch ........................................ 1-44
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-42
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-47
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-42
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? ........ 1-43
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-41
Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-38
Antenna, Diversity Antenna System ................... 3-81
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ..... 3-81
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................... 5-6
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-53
Appearance Care ............................................ 6-70
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels .............. 6-76
Care of Safety Belts .................................... 6-73
Appearance Care (cont.)
Chemical Paint Spotting ...............................
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ....................
Fabric/Carpet ..............................................
Finish Care .................................................
Finish Damage ............................................
Glass Surfaces ............................................
Instrument Panel .........................................
Interior Plastic Components ...........................
Leather ......................................................
Sheet Metal Damage ...................................
Speaker Covers ..........................................
Tires ..........................................................
Underbody Maintenance ...............................
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................
Vinyl ..........................................................
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................
Weatherstrips ..............................................
Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................
Wood Panels ..............................................
Ashtrays ........................................................
Audio System .................................................
Audio System(s) .............................................
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ......................
Care of Your CD Player ...............................
Care of Your CDs ........................................
Diversity Antenna System .............................
6-77
6-74
6-70
6-74
6-77
6-73
6-72
6-72
6-72
6-77
6-73
6-76
6-77
6-78
6-72
6-74
6-73
6-75
6-72
3-39
4-45
3-78
3-79
3-80
3-80
3-81
1
Audio System(s) (cont.)
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................
Understanding Radio Reception .....................
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............
Automatic Transmission
Fluid ..........................................................
Operation ...................................................
Avoid Point/Area, Edit ......................................
3-78
3-80
3-81
6-20
2-25
4-20
B
Battery .......................................................... 6-36
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ...................... 3-32
Run-Down Protection ................................... 3-33
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 5-22
Brake
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................ 5-6
Emergencies ................................................ 5-8
Parking ...................................................... 2-28
System Warning Light .................................. 3-52
Brakes .......................................................... 6-33
Braking ........................................................... 5-5
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 5-8
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-21
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 6-44
Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 6-42
Buying New Tires ........................................... 6-58
2
C
California Fuel .................................................. 6-5
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Capacities and Specifications ............................ 6-85
Carbon Monoxide ................... 2-13, 2-32, 5-25, 5-35
Care of
Safety Belts ................................................ 6-73
Your CD Player ........................................... 3-80
Your CDs ................................................... 3-80
CD
Six-Disc Changer ......................................... 4-61
CD/DVD Player .............................................. 4-63
Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-42
Chains, Tire ................................................... 6-63
Check
Engine Light ............................................... 3-55
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 6-10
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 6-77
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-24
Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-21
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) .......................... 1-28
Older Children ............................................. 1-19
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System ........................................ 1-30
Child Restraints (cont.)
Securing a Child Restraint in the Passenger
Seat Position ...........................................
Top Strap ...................................................
Cigarette Lighter .............................................
Cleaning
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ..............
Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................................
Fabric/Carpet ..............................................
Finish Care .................................................
Glass Surfaces ............................................
Instrument Panel .........................................
Interior Plastic Components ...........................
Leather ......................................................
Speaker Covers ..........................................
Tires ..........................................................
Underbody Maintenance ...............................
Vinyl ..........................................................
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................
Weatherstrips ..............................................
Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................
Wood Panels ..............................................
Climate Control System
Air Filter, Passenger Compartment .................
Dual ..........................................................
Outlet Adjustment ........................................
1-32
1-27
3-39
6-76
6-74
6-70
6-74
6-73
6-72
6-72
6-72
6-73
6-76
6-77
6-72
6-74
6-73
6-75
6-72
3-45
3-40
3-45
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 5-5
Convenience Net ............................................ 2-44
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-54
Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-24
Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............................. 6-23
Cooled Seats ................................................... 1-3
Cooling System .............................................. 6-26
Courtesy Lamps ............................................. 3-33
Cruise Control, Adaptive .................................. 3-16
Cruise Control Lever ....................................... 3-12
Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-42
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation .................................. 8-7
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY)
Users ....................................................... 8-4
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 8-4
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 8-2
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... 8-5
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors ....... 8-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ............................................ 8-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government ............................................ 8-11
Roadside Service .......................................... 8-6
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 8-12
3
D
Database Coverage Explanations ...................... 4-45
Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-30
Defensive Driving ............................................. 5-2
Diversity Antenna System ................................. 3-81
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 6-4
Door
Locks .......................................................... 2-9
Power Door Locks ....................................... 2-11
Driver
Position, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-10
Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-61
DIC Controls and Displays ............................ 3-61
DIC Vehicle Personalization .......................... 3-73
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-64
Other Messages .......................................... 3-72
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 5-16
City ........................................................... 5-20
Defensive ..................................................... 5-2
Drunken ....................................................... 5-2
Freeway ..................................................... 5-21
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 5-23
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 5-18
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 5-30
Winter ........................................................ 5-25
Dual Climate Control System ............................ 3-40
4
E
Edit
Avoid Point/Area ..........................................
Memory Point .............................................
Waypoint ....................................................
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ......................................
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...........................
Instrument Panel Fuse Block .........................
Power Windows and Other Power Options ......
Underhood Fuse Block .................................
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter .........................................
Battery .......................................................
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............
Coolant ......................................................
Coolant Heater ............................................
Coolant Temperature Gage ...........................
Engine Compartment Overview ......................
Exhaust .....................................................
Oil .............................................................
Oil Pressure Gage .......................................
Overheated Protection Operating Mode ...........
Overheating ................................................
Starting ......................................................
4-20
4-13
4-17
6-80
6-80
6-81
6-80
6-83
6-80
6-18
6-36
3-55
6-20
2-24
3-54
6-12
2-32
6-13
3-58
6-25
6-23
2-23
Enter Destination ............................................ 4-21
Entry/Exit Lighting ........................................... 3-33
Event Data Recorders (EDR) ............................. 8-9
Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-18
Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-28
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver .......................... 3-32
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 6-18
Finish Damage ............................................... 6-77
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-9
Flat Tire ........................................................ 6-68
Floor Mats ..................................................... 2-43
Fluid
Automatic Transmission ................................ 6-20
Power Steering ........................................... 6-31
Windshield Washer ...................................... 6-32
Fog Lamp Light .............................................. 3-59
Fog Lamps .................................................... 3-31
Fuel ............................................................... 6-5
Additives ...................................................... 6-6
California Fuel .............................................. 6-5
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 6-10
Filling Your Tank ........................................... 6-7
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 6-6
Gage ......................................................... 3-60
Fuel (cont.)
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 6-5
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 6-5
Fuses
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 6-80
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......................... 6-81
Underhood Fuse Block ................................. 6-83
Windshield Wiper ......................................... 6-80
G
Gage
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-54
Engine Oil Pressure ..................................... 3-58
Fuel .......................................................... 3-60
Speedometer .............................................. 3-48
Tachometer ................................................. 3-48
Voltmeter Gage ........................................... 3-51
Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-38
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 6-5
Specifications ............................................... 6-5
Getting Started
Getting Started, Navigation ............................. 4-4
Global Positioning System (GPS) ...................... 4-42
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-42
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 8-5
5
H
I
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6
Headlamp
Aiming ....................................................... 6-42
Vertical Aiming ............................................ 6-43
Headlamps
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 6-44
Daytime Running Lamps ............................... 3-30
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-9
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8
On Reminder .............................................. 3-29
Washer ...................................................... 3-12
Wiper Activated ........................................... 3-29
Head-Up Display (HUD) ................................... 3-34
Heated Seats ................................................... 1-3
Heater ........................................................... 3-40
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-59
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 5-23
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 5-23
HomeLink® Transmitter .................................... 2-38
HomeLink® Transmitter, Programming ................ 2-39
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 6-10
Release ..................................................... 6-11
Horn ............................................................... 3-6
How to Use This Manual ...................................... ii
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-10
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-22
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-21
Inflation -- Tire Pressure .................................. 6-53
Instrument Panel
Brightness .................................................. 3-32
Cluster ....................................................... 3-46
Overview ..................................................... 3-4
6
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 6-37
K
Keyless Access System ..................................... 2-4
Keyless Access System, Operation ...................... 2-5
Keyless Entry System ...................................... 4-42
Keys ............................................................... 2-2
L
Labelling, Tire Sidewall .................................... 6-47
Lamps
Battery Run-Down Protection ......................... 3-33
Courtesy .................................................... 3-33
Lamps (cont.)
Exterior ......................................................
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ......................
Fog ...........................................................
Reading .....................................................
Twilight Sentinel® ........................................
LATCH System
Child Restraints ...........................................
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System ........................................
Lifting Your Vehicle, Tires .................................
Light
Airbag Off ..................................................
Airbag Readiness ........................................
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ...................
Brake System Warning .................................
Fog Lamp ..................................................
Highbeam On .............................................
Lights On Reminder .....................................
Malfunction Indicator ....................................
Safety Belt Reminder ...................................
Security .....................................................
TCS Warning Light ......................................
Tire Pressure ..............................................
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning ..........
3-28
3-32
3-31
3-33
3-31
1-28
1-30
6-64
3-50
3-49
3-53
3-52
3-59
3-59
3-59
3-55
3-48
3-59
3-53
3-55
3-53
Lighting
Entry/Exit ................................................... 3-33
Limited-Slip Rear Axle ....................................... 5-9
Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-12
Locks
Door ........................................................... 2-9
Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-12
Power Door ................................................ 2-11
Loss of Control ............................................... 5-15
Lowering the Retractable Hardtop ...................... 2-45
Lumbar
Power Controls ............................................. 1-2
M
Magnetic Ride Control ....................................... 5-9
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services ........................... 7-6
At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 7-8
At Least Once a Month .................................. 7-8
At Least Once a Year .................................... 7-9
Introduction .................................................. 7-2
Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 7-7
Maintenance Record .................................... 7-14
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 7-2
7
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ......... 7-13
Owner Checks and Services ........................... 7-8
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 7-11
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 7-4
Using Your ................................................... 7-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 7-2
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-55
Map Pocket ................................................... 2-43
Maps ............................................................ 4-33
Memory Mirrors .............................................. 2-54
Memory Point, Edit ......................................... 4-13
Memory Seat ................................................. 2-54
Memory Steering Wheel Controls ...................... 2-54
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-64
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar® ....... 2-34
Memory ..................................................... 2-54
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ................. 2-35
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-36
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror .................... 2-35
Outside Power Heated Mirrors ....................... 2-34
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 8-3
8
N
Navigation ................................................. 4-2, 4-4
Using the System .......................................... 4-4
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-21
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............ 7-13
O
Odometer ...................................................... 3-48
Odometer, Trip ............................................... 3-48
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 5-13
Oil
Engine ....................................................... 6-13
Engine Oil Pressure Gage ............................ 3-58
Life Indicator ............................................... 3-77
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-19
Online Owner Center ........................................ 8-3
OnStar® System ..................................... 2-36, 4-42
Ordering
Map DVDs ................................................. 4-45
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-45
Outside
Automatic Dimming Mirror ............................. 2-35
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-36
Curb View Assist Mirror ................................ 2-35
Power Heated Mirrors .................................. 2-34
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode ..... 6-25
Owner Checks and Services .............................. 7-8
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
P
Park Aid ........................................................
Park (P)
Shifting Into ................................................
Shifting Out of ............................................
Parking
Assist ........................................................
Brake ........................................................
Over Things That Burn .................................
Passenger Compartment Air Filter .....................
Passenger Position, Safety Belts .......................
Passing .........................................................
Plan Route ....................................................
3-37
2-30
2-31
3-37
2-28
2-32
3-45
1-18
5-14
4-13
Player
CD ............................................................ 4-63
DVD .......................................................... 4-63
Power
Accessory Outlets ........................................ 3-38
Door Locks ................................................. 2-11
Electrical System ......................................... 6-80
Lumbar Controls ........................................... 1-2
Reclining Seatback ........................................ 1-4
Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-22
Seat ............................................................ 1-2
Steering Fluid ............................................. 6-31
Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering Column ....... 3-7
Windows .................................................... 2-17
Pretensioners, Safety Belt ................................ 1-18
Problems with Route Guidance ......................... 4-44
Programming the HomeLink® Transmitter ........... 2-39
Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts .......... 1-9
9
R
Radio ............................................................ 4-45
Personalization with Home and Away Feature .... 4-69
Radios .......................................................... 3-78
Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-80
Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-80
Theft-Deterrent ............................................ 3-78
Understanding Reception .............................. 3-80
Rainsense™ Wipers ........................................ 3-10
Raising the Retractable Hardtop ........................ 2-46
Reading Lamps .............................................. 3-33
Rear Axle ...................................................... 6-41
Limited-Slip .................................................. 5-9
Rear Storage Area .......................................... 2-44
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming
with OnStar® .............................................. 2-34
Reclining Seatback, Power ................................. 1-4
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 7-11
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 5-35
Remote Keyless Entry System .......................... 4-42
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 8-11
General Motors ........................................... 8-11
United States Government ............................ 8-11
10
Restraint System Check
Checking Your Restraint Systems ................... 1-48
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash .................................................. 1-48
Restraint Systems
Checking .................................................... 1-48
Replacing Parts ........................................... 1-48
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-22
Retractable Hardtop ........................................ 2-45
Lowering .................................................... 2-45
Raising ...................................................... 2-46
Roadside
Service ........................................................ 8-6
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 5-30
Route Preference ............................................ 4-31
Run-Flat Tires ................................................ 6-52
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....... 2-33
S
Safety Belt
Pretensioners .............................................. 1-18
Reminder Light ............................................ 3-48
Safety Belts
Care of ...................................................... 6-73
Driver Position ............................................ 1-10
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-10
Passenger Position ...................................... 1-18
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ....... 1-9
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-18
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-17
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ......................... 1-5
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 7-4
Seats
Heated and Cooled Seats .............................. 1-3
Memory ..................................................... 2-54
Power Lumbar .............................................. 1-2
Power Reclining Seatback .............................. 1-4
Power Seats ................................................. 1-2
Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH System ................... 1-30
Passenger Seat Position ............................... 1-32
Security Light ................................................. 3-59
Service ........................................................... 6-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle .............................................. 6-5
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 6-4
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-55
Publications Ordering Information ................... 8-12
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-47
Setup ............................................................. 4-7
Setup Menu
Menu .......................................................... 4-7
Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 6-77
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-30
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-31
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-8
Six-Disc CD Changer ...................................... 4-61
Specifications, Capacities ................................. 6-85
Speedometer .................................................. 3-48
StabiliTrak® System ......................................... 5-10
Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-23
Steering ........................................................ 5-11
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ......................... 3-79
Steering Wheel Controls, Memory ..................... 2-54
Steering Wheel, Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic
Steering Column ........................................... 3-7
Storage Areas
Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-42
Convenience Net ......................................... 2-44
Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-42
Glove Box .................................................. 2-42
Map Pocket ................................................ 2-43
Rear Storage Area ....................................... 2-44
11
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...................... 5-29
Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-18
Symbols ........................................................ 4-36
System Needs Service, If ................................. 4-45
System Overview
Overview, Navigation System .......................... 4-2
T
Tachometer .................................................... 3-48
TCS Warning Light .......................................... 3-53
Telescopic Steering Column, Power Tilt Wheel ...... 3-7
Theft-Deterrent, Radio ..................................... 3-78
Theft-Deterrent System .................................... 2-19
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-19
Tire
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-55
Tires ............................................................. 6-46
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,
Cleaning ................................................. 6-76
Buying New Tires ........................................ 6-58
Chains ....................................................... 6-63
Cleaning .................................................... 6-76
12
Tires (cont.)
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 6-68
Inflation -- Tire Pressure ............................... 6-53
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 6-57
Lifting Your Vehicle ...................................... 6-64
Pressure Monitor System .............................. 6-55
Run-Flat ..................................................... 6-52
Tire Sidewall Labelling .................................. 6-47
Tire Terminology and Definitions .................... 6-49
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 6-59
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 6-61
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 6-61
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 6-58
Top Strap ...................................................... 1-27
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 5-35
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 5-35
Your Vehicle ............................................... 5-35
Traction
Control System (TCS) .................................... 5-8
Control System Warning Light ....................... 3-53
Limited-Slip Rear Axle .................................... 5-9
Magnetic Ride Control ................................... 5-9
Stabilitrak® System ...................................... 5-10
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 6-20
Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-25
Trip Computer
Oil Life Indicator .......................................... 3-77
Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-48
Trunk ............................................................ 2-13
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-8
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7
Twilight Sentinel® ............................................ 3-31
U
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ............... 3-37
Understanding Radio Reception ........................ 3-80
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 6-59
V
Valet Lockout Switch ....................................... 2-21
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 5-5
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv
Symbols ......................................................... iv
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders .................................................... 8-9
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................. 6-79
Service Parts Identification Label ................... 6-79
Vehicle Personalization
DIC ........................................................... 3-73
Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel ...... 2-54
Vehicle Positioning .......................................... 4-43
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-45
Visors ........................................................... 2-18
Voice Recognition ........................................... 4-69
Voltmeter Gage .............................................. 3-51
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-46
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-64
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
Waypoint, Edit ................................................ 4-17
13
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 6-61
Replacement ............................................... 6-61
Windows ....................................................... 2-16
Power ........................................................ 2-17
Windshield
Wiper Blades, Cleaning ................................ 6-75
Windshield Washer ......................................... 3-12
Fluid .......................................................... 6-32
Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement ...................................... 6-45
Fuses ........................................................ 6-80
Rainsense™ Wipers ..................................... 3-10
Windshield Wipers ......................................... 3-9
14
Winter Driving ................................................ 5-25
Wiper Activated Headlamps .............................. 3-29
X
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ................ 3-81
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 7-2